plan a trip to england

Finding the Universe

Travel tales, photography and a dash of humor

2 Weeks in the UK – My Perfect UK Trip Itinerary

Last updated: April 16, 2024 . Written by Laurence Norah - 219 Comments

If you are looking for a two week UK itinerary which includes Ireland, you have come to the right place. This UK road trip itinerary has you starting in London, and using a rental car as the transportation method. It covers some of our highlights in the UK, including cities, castles, and stunning natural scenery.

I have spent a great deal of time living in and exploring the UK. I’ve drawn on my experiences travelling here to put together my perfect two week UK trip to help you plan your own trip.

This UK itinerary (which also includes Ireland) covers England, Scotland, Northern Ireland and Wales. It’s a self-drive road-trip, although could also be modified to support travel by public transport if you prefer.

If you haven’t driven in the UK before, do check out my guide to driving in the UK for helpful tips. We also have a guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK if you need budget planning help.

Without further ado, allow me to present my two-week UK itinerary.

A 2 week UK Trip itinerary

This itinerary is very busy and fits a lot in, including time in Ireland. It is doable, but just be aware that it will be fast paced with quite a lot of driving. Naturally, you are welcome to take the itinerary and adjust it to meet your own interests and pace.

For example, many folks prefer to focus on the UK with their two weeks, and skip the island of Ireland, returning instead via the Lake District and Wales. However, if you want to see as much as possible, this itinerary is how to do it.

Days 1 & 2: London

The UK’s capital is one of my favourite cities in the world. It’s been hanging around for over 2000 years on the banks of the Thames, and there is just an incredible wealth of things to see, from historical sights, to amazing museums, to crazy street markets.

It’s a wonderfully walk-able capital, and you can easily take in the major central sights in a day or so, leaving you the second day to explore museums, art galleries, or go a little further afield and take in some of the other sights, from crumbling cemeteries to massive parks. And if all else fails, you will never be short on an incredible pub to while away some time before heading on.

For inspiration for your visit, take a look at our 2 day London itinerary , which covers the major highlights of the city, and also links to lots of other information about visiting, including tips on finding Harry Potter locations in London through to Winston Churchill locations in London – something for everyone!

My advice for London is to invest in an Oyster card to save money on your transport (don’t hire a car until you leave the capital) and if you think you’re going to use it, look into buying a London Pass to save money on London’s top attractions.

Available in 1, 3 and 6 day versions, as well as a version with an included Oyster card, the savings can really be quite impressive if you plan on visiting a few locations. You can read a full break down on when the London Pass is worth buying here , and buy one yourself here .

Finally, London is probably going to be the most expensive city in the UK for your accommodation. We recommend booking well in advance to get a good deal.

Some of our recommended accommodation options in London are:

The Walrus Bar and Hostel , The Z hotel in Shoreditch , Point A Hotel , Lime Tree Hotel and the  Resident Victoria Hotel . You can see more London hotel listings here on booking.com . We also love the curated apartments available on Plum Guide .

Once you have finished up exploring London, we suggest collecting your car hire and heading out of town. For car hire we recommend Discover Cars , they search all the major providers so you can compare and find the best deal for your trip.

Days 3 & 4: Oxford & the Cotswolds

One of the stipulations of the original question was the wish to avoid feeling too much like a tourist. Unfortunately, this is nearly impossible in Oxford , as nearly everyone there is either a tourist or a student. I lived in and around Oxford for a number of years, and generally felt like a tourist most of that time too.

Part of the reason for that is that this tiny city is absolutely jam packed with incredible buildings, largely in the form of the Oxford Colleges. These are seriously wealthy establishments, who clearly had no problem flaunting that wealth in an architectural fashion back in the day.

This means that yes, it is full of people wandering around, mouths agape, at quite how pretty the whole thing is. Yes, it’s jam packed with tourists. But for good reason!

So strap that camera on and snap away. Then go for a punt on the river, and enjoy some Pimms or a cream tea. Seek out the Harry Potter filming locations . Take a walking tour of the Universities . There’s no shortage of way to fill your time!

Read more tips for spending a day in Oxford, here .

From Oxford you are also well located to take in the incredibly picturesque Cotswolds area – all quaint villages and rolling countryside. The England that everyone imagines England to be like, with country pubs, village greens and cricket ovals. Lovely stuff. Check out hotel prices for  Oxford here .

Days 5 & 6: Peak District and Manchester

From Oxford I’m going to suggest heading “up north”, towards the Peak District national park. Think rolling hills, quaint villages, and beautiful walks.

There are also some fabulous stately homes to visit , not to mention that on the way from Oxford you can stop off at Warwick Castle – one of the UK’s best-preserved castles.

If you’re interested in the industrial revolution in the UK I can highly recommend a visit to the city of Manchester.

Of course, if the industrial revolution isn’t your thing there are plenty of other reasons to visit Manchester, including excellent retail therapy, an awesome food scene, and a variety of architectural highlights. Not to mention the music scene!

You can see my guide to things to do in Manchester for lots more ideas, and you can see hotel prices for Manchester here .

One other thing you might consider as you pass through the Peak District and Manchester is a visit to Alton Towers . This is arguably the UK’s best known theme park, and would make for a great thrilling day out for those of you who like that sort of thing.

Day 7: York

Not that far from Manchester (England is so quaintly explorable!), the city of York is another of my favourite UK cities.

From the incredible Gothic York Minster (a climb to the top is highly recommended) to the winding, tumbled down alleyways of the shambles, to the Viking history – this is a city that just cries out for exploration.

It’s also an awesome place if you’re into ghost stories. There are a whole number of ghost walks that take in the spooky past of York, so if you want an evening of entertainment and intrigue, likely accompanied with a number of fine drinking establishments, an evening ghost walk is a great bit of fun.

I’m not a great believer in this sort of thing usually, but I took a tour and thoroughly enjoyed it!

If you do plan on seeing a few things in York, you might save money with a York City Pass , which includes most of the attractions in the city as well as access to the York Sightseeing bus or York City Cruises. You can buy that in advance here .

For more York ideas, see our guide to spending two days in York , which has a comprehensive itinerary as well as tips on where to stay and how to get around.

For accommodation, you can check out and book the best York hotels here .

Days 8 & 9: Edinburgh via Northumberland

From York we’re going to wave farewell to England, and head up to Scotland’s capital city, Edinburgh. On the way though, you’ll be passing through some of England’s least travelled, yet stunningly beautiful, landscapes.

I am of course talking about Northumbria. From miles of deserted beach, to crumbling castles, to the Roman equivalent of the great wall of China, Northumbria really has a lot to offer someone looking for a slightly off the beaten track England experience. The rolling landscapes are breath-taking and you’ll find yourself alone much of the time. Worth taking a bit of time to explore, in my opinion.

Then of course, it’s up to Edinburgh , where you’ll not be short of amazing things to look at. From Edinburgh castle, to Arthurs Seat, from fine whiskys, to Princes Street, there really is enough here for a number of days of entertainment. And if you visit during the Fringe festival… well… plan on being entertained for a good many weeks!

See more ideas on spending some time in Edinburgh in this detailed two day Edinburgh itinerary that I put together, as well as our guide to things to do in Edinburgh , our tips on visiting Edinburgh in winter , and our guide to finding Harry Potter in Edinburgh .

Then  check and book your Edinburgh hotels here.

Days 10 – 12: Ireland

Because the UK is an easily explorable place with decent roads and relatively short distances to drive, it is totally possible to include another country – Ireland! – in a trip like this if you’re up for it.

Do be aware that if you are renting a car, some car rental companies have restrictions on taking cars on ferries, or into other countries – so make sure you check before you go as there may be an additional fee to pay.

Of course, you could also fly to Ireland (Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin for example), and use different rentals for different parts of your adventure!

If all that sounds like too much hard work, you could extend your time in Scotland, or alternatively, you could take in the west coast of the UK, including Glasgow , the Lake District, and Liverpool, as well as popping into Wales for the stunning Snowdonia national park, and rejoin this itinerary in South Wales or Bristol . The choice is yours!

If it is Ireland you want though, it’s a short ferry ride from Scotland (Cairnryan to be precise, which is 2-3 hour drive from Edinburgh) across to Belfast in Northern Ireland, from where you can spend a few days exploring the Emerald Isle.

We have travelled from Cairnryan with both Stena Line and P&O Ferries, both of which have been a fast, comfortable and efficient service. We normally use Direct Ferries for ferry booking as they compare prices across all the providers and support payment in multple currencies. You can book your ferry tickets here .

This part of the world has a lot to offer, and three days is quite a short amount of time. We can recommend spending some time in Belfast and driving north along the causeway coastal route to see such highlights as the Giant’s Causeway, ruined castles and spectacular coastline. Then, head south into Ireland, and see fabulous Dublin.

I’ve explored Dublin and her surroundings, taken a trip down to the Dingle Peninsula , kissed the Blarney Stone at Blarney Castle, gazed at the Cliffs of Moher ,  and visited the Dark Hedges of Game of Thrones fame – to name but a few of our wonderful experience on the Irish Isle.

In Dublin there’s the Guinness Factory, of course, as a popular highlight, but also oodles of Gaelic history and culture to get excited about.

There are also of course the Irish people, well known for their love of a good time! Personally, I’d head on down the coast from Belfast, through Dublin and down to the port of Rosslare, where after three exciting days in Ireland another ferry service will whisk you across to the last of the four countries to make up the UK: Wales!

Day 13: South Wales and Cardiff

In Wales you will arrive either at Fishguard or Pembroke – both excellent places to explore the Pembrokeshire Coast national park . Here you will find beautiful beaches, rugged cliffs, and fabulous opportunities for walking.

You’re also not too far a drive from Cardiff, the Welsh capital. Four capitals in a fortnight – not bad going! Here you’ll find castles, sporting venues and more Welsh based culture than you can shake a stick at. Plus, arrive at the right time of year and you’ll find the Great British Cheese festival in full swing. What’s not to be excited about? For more about travelling in Wales and highlights along this route, see our detailed Wales road trip itinerary .

Find and book your Cardiff hotels here .

Day 14: Bristol & Bath

From Cardiff you’ll cross the enormous Severn estuary over the impress Severn road bridge and be back in the UK, or Bristol to be precise. Here you’ll find all sorts of interesting items of historical interest, largely running on a nautical theme, as well as some of the best street art in Britain .

For over a thousand years Bristol has been an important English port. From early explorers and traders, to the dark years of the African slave vessels, to filling Australia with immigrants, it is hard to understate the role that Bristol has played in Britain’s sea faring history. There is, after all, a reason for the expression “ship-shape and Bristol fashion” having a place in the English language.

I can highly recommend taking a trip round the SS Great Britain when you’re in Bristol. Built in 1843, and designed by the engineering genius who was Isambard Kingdom Brunel – the man who almost single-handedly revolutionised both engineering and public transport in the UK.

The SS Great Britain is notable as being the first steamer to cross the Atlantic – setting a record pace for the time of 14 days. An amazing bit of history. Note that tickets are slightly cheaper if you book them online, which you can do online here .

For more ideas in Bristol, check out our guide to things to do in Bristol , which should give you plenty of ideas to fill your time. Find the best prices on Bristol hotels and book here .

From Bristol it’s on to the Roman spa city of Bath, a world heritage site. Like Oxford , this is a difficult place to be anything other than a tourist, but it is so worth it all the same!

Day 15: Back to London, via Stonehenge!

Our last day of our just over two week UK itinerary takes us back to London. No trip to the UK though would really be complete without taking in perhaps our most famous monument – the circle of rocks known as Stonehenge.

There is just something about the place that makes you wonder. A circle of rocks, built by a people who had nothing but their hands and some bits of wood to help them out, in the middle of the Wiltshire countryside, hundreds of miles from an actual quarry, is just mind blowing.

Add in the pagan ritualism, the relationship between the rocks and the sun, and the sheer mystery of the place, and you have somewhere that is capable of really capturing the imagination. Worth your time to visit (see more thoughts from a trip to Stonehenge here ).

Plus, while you’re there you can pop into Salisbury and enjoy the cathedral, which boasts the highest cathedral spire of any church in the UK.

And then… back to London, where this tour finishes!

2 Weeks in the UK: Road Trip Map

Here’s a map of the route , for your reference.

2 Week UK Itinerary Summary

• Days 1 & 2 : London
• Days 3 & 4 : Oxford & the Cotswolds
• Days 5 & 6 : Peak District and Manchester
• Day 7 : York
• Days 8 & 9 : Edinburgh via Northumberland
• Days 10 – 12 : Ireland
• Day 13 : South Wales and Cardiff
• Day 14 : Bristol & Bath
• Day 15 : Back to London, via Stonehenge!

Can you do this 2 Week UK itinerary by public transport?

A popular question from readers is whether or not this itinerary can be done by public transport. I appreciate that of course not everyone wants to drive in the UK, and the answer, for the most part, is yes.

Certainly, between the major cities on the itinerary there are good rail and/or bus links, with the train usually being a little faster. The main challenge is the rural sections of the route – for example, exploring the Cotswolds, Northumbria or the Peak District. This is possible using local buses of course, but it can definitely slow you down a fair bit, and so you would need to adjust the itinerary a little to fit the schedule.

Another option is to add in some days in London or Edinburgh, and doing some specific day trips from these cities to take in the out of town attractions.

For example, there is this  day trip from London that takes in highlights such as Bath and Stonehenge. Then, for Northumbria and the Scottish Borders, including beautiful Alnwick Castle, consider this tour from Edinburgh .

If you are interested in doing this itinerary by public transport, check out my guide to taking a 10 day UK trip by public transport, which as well as a route, has lots of ideas for how to book different forms of transport in the most effective and cost-efficient way.

What About Touring the UK With A Tour Company?

Another popular question is whether or not this sort of trip can be done with a tour company, and if we have any companies we would recommend for this.

So you have a few options for doing this which I have outlined below.

The first option is to take a group tour of the UK. There are a number of companies offering small group tours – we’d recommend finding a service which operates tours of 15 people or less. We usually use and recommend Rabbie’s Trail Burners , who operate trips around the UK and Ireland, and have a number of tour options to choose from.

We haven’t found a tour that exactly matches our UK wide itinerary, but we still have a solution for those of you wanting the do a similar trip as part of a guided tour.

First, we recommend you spend two or three days in London, following our suggested London itinerary .

Next, we recommend you take something similar to this small group tour , which takes eight days to take you from London to Edinburgh.

In Edinburgh, you can spend a couple of days following our Edinburgh itinerary , after which you can easily fly to either Belfast or Dublin direct from Edinburgh.

Here you can either explore these lovely cities, or take a tour to explore more of the country, we’d recommend either this three day tour of Northern Ireland  or this three day tour of the southern and western coast .

Alternatively, if you’d prefer to skip Ireland, you could take something like this five day tour of the Scottish Highlands and Skye .

Finally, you can either return to London, or have your flights home depart from Dublin or Edinburgh, depending on your tour choice.

The other option is a bespoke tour company and/or a private tour guide, who will be able to put a tour together for you, including guiding, transport and accommodation.

Of all the options, this will generally be the most expensive way to travel, but it will also give you total flexibility in terms of your trip and schedule, plus you’ll have a guide with you every step of the way, taking all the hassle out of your trip.

For this sort of tour, we recommend the services of Robina Brown, who is a blue-badge guide offering tours across the UK. See her website here .

When to Visit the UK

You can visit the UK at any time of year, although for the best weather and longer daylight hours, we’d definitely suggest visiting in the warmer months – from May to September. May is probably our favourite time of year, the weather is usually quite reasonable but the tourist crowds are not too intense.

Christmas, and the period leading up to Christmas, can also be a wonderful time to visit, when the streets and shops are all brightly lit and decorated for the festive season. For a good example of this, check out our guide to visiting Edinburgh at Christmas .

Where to Stay in the UK:

For accommodation , there are a great many options to choose from, ranging from cosy B&B’s through to upmarket hotels, and everything in between. Finding the best deal on your accommodation is an important part of trip planning – helping you to get the most from your budget, as well as find the property that is right for you.

• We’ve tried a lot of booking sites, and nearly always find ourselves using Booking.com. They have an extensive selection of properties, many with no-fee cancellation policies, and often run discounts and special offers. Click on each city title to see their listings:  London , Oxford ,  Manchester , York , Edinburgh , Dublin , Cardiff and Bristol .
• If you prefer an apartment or more of a hosted stay, then we recommend Plum Guide . We’ve tried all the others, and in our experience Plum Guide consistently has the highest quality options for the locations they are available.
• If you can’t find what you want on Plum Guide, or you want some new options to try out, we wrote a whole post on the best alternatives to AirBnB , as well as a guide to our favourite holiday cottage accommodation in the UK , which you should check out!

Between these options, you should find the best prices and places to stay for your trip, as well as a good selection of reviews and feedback to help you make an informed decision.

How to Get Around the UK

For this kind of trip I also obviously recommend that you look into renting a car. We have used and can recommend Enterprise Car Rental , they usually have great rates, especially for one way rentals. We also recommend comparing car prices using a service like Discover Cars , which compares prices across a range of providers to help you find the best deal.

A hire car will give you a lot more flexibility than public transport, and prices are generally fairly reasonable. However, if you would prefer to do a trip like this by public transport instead of driving yourself, check out our UK itinerary by public transport for ideas.

Another option for travelling in the UK is to hire a motorhome. Whilst this might not be practical for a city focused trip, you might prefer it if you are planning on visiting more rural locations.

For campervan rental we suggest checking out Motorhome Republic . They offer a campervans from a range of companies at different price points, so you can find the right one for you. You can see their UK listings here .

Further reading for your UK Trip

We’ve got lots of resources to help you plan your trip to the UK, from posts we’ve written ourselves to third party content we’re happy to recommend. Here it is:

• If you want a shorter trip, taking in some more off the beaten path destinations, check out this one week itinerary of the UK that I put together. If you’d prefer not to drive yourself, we also have a 10 day UK itinerary by public transport .
• To prepare for your trip to the UK, we’ve put together a detailed UK packing list which covers both London and the wider UK at any time of year
• This is a self-drive trip, so you should definitely check out our guide to driving in the UK for helpful tips.
• We also have a guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK  which will help you cost out a trip like this.
• A guide to driving Scotland’s epic North Coast 500 , as well as accommodation options on the North Coast 500
• When you’re near Glasgow, you should check out the beautiful Devil’s Pulpit in Finnich Glen
• A two day Edinburgh itinerary & 21 Highlights in Edinburgh
• Edinburgh: Getting off the beaten path
• A Two Day Glasgow and Loch Lomond itinerary
• A guide to 10 of the best Stately Homes in England , to give you some ideas as you plan your itinerary
• For London, we have some detailed itineraries to help you plan your visit. These include a 1 Day London Itinerary , a Two Day London itinerary and a Six Day London itinerary
• The top Harry Potter sites in London
• The Best Photography Locations in London
• Tips on Buying and Using the London Pass
• Eight Things to Do in Kensington
• The Highlights of Oxford
• Our guide to things to do in Cambridge
• Visiting Blenheim Palace and the Cotswolds
• 20 Things To Do in Dublin , a 2 day Dublin itinerary and a 3 day Dublin itinerary
• A Guide to Touring the Scottish Borders
• Getting online when travelling in a foreign country can be daunting – check out our guide to getting online when travelling to help you figure out the best options for your trip
• If you’re interested in getting better photos when you travel, take a look at my online photography course , where I’ll teach you everything you need to know about getting better photos – whatever camera you have!
• If you want a physical (or digital!) book to accompany your travels, then Amazon do a good line in UK Travel Guides , and there is naturally a Lonely Planet and a Rough Guide to the UK available.

If you’re planning on visiting a number of historical properties, there are a couple of options you have for saving money as a visitor to the UK. Two main organisations exist to preserve these properties, the National Trust, and English Heritage.

Both of these organisations offer specific passes for visitors to the UK, which represent great value for money for visitors.

For the National Trust you can pick up a National Trust touring pass . This is valid for 7 or 14 days, and gives you access to every National Trust property in the England, Wales and Northern Ireland.

For English Heritage , you can get an English Heritage Overseas Visitor Pass . This is valid for 9 or 16 days, and gives you access to every English Heritage property in the UK.

Alternatively, you can also buy a full membership to these organisations, which will last a full year. You can buy an English Heritage Membership here and a National Trust membership here .

So those were my thoughts for taking in a slightly longer than two week trip in the UK. I’ve obviously missed out a great number of places, as no two week trip can possibly hope to see everything, but I’d like to think I covered a great many highlights of this truly fascinating country.

As always, if you’ve got any thoughts on this post, do hit up the comments below!

Enjoyed this post? Why not share it!

There are 219 comments on this post

Please scroll to the end to leave a comment

25th February 2024 at 6:30 pm

Hello, we are planning a trip this summer. On my list is scotch tasting in Islay. How many days should we add? Do you have any recommendations?

Laurence Norah says

25th February 2024 at 9:28 pm

Sure thing. Islay is beautiful and very much worth a visit. I’d suggest spending a couple of day at least if you can spare it as it takes a bit of time to get to and from the island and there is plenty to see and do there. I have a guide to things to do on Islay which might help. In terms of whisky distilleries, if you have a favourite whisky that I’d obviously recommend going to that distillery. My favourite whisky is Laphroaig, so I enjoyed visiting that distillery particularly. However my guide to Islay lists all the currently active ones so you can make a choice as to which one you prefer.

Have a great trip!

Marcelo Gurgel says

18th January 2024 at 11:52 pm

Hello ! Your post is very good ! I would like to do a similar tour, but on a motorcycle. Including Isle of Man where the TT Isle of Man race will take place. Please for I leave the bike on the London side and take the Ferry by foot and the best option? Cheaper in this case? How much do ferries generally cost? Where do I search for tickets and itineraries? Thanks a lot for the help !

19th January 2024 at 12:02 am

Hi Marcelo,

Thank you! So the only company which operates ferries to the Isle of Man is the Isle of Man Steam Packet Company, and the best way to book a ferry is directly on their website here . They operate services from Heysham, Liverpool, Belfast and Dublin.

If you plan on visiting during the TT race then you should book as soon as you can as this is a very popular event.

The price will vary depennding on when you go but it is definitely less expensive to go as a foot passenger. Looking at a route, it’s around £40 – £50 one way for a foot passenger, and £120 – £140 for a passenger with a bike. However, remember that you will need to pay to park your bike somewhere secure, and you will also need to have transport on the Isle of Man. Also, at more popular times, such as during the TT races, prices can be higher.

I hope this helps, let me know if you have any more questions! Safe travels!

PAUL BASILE says

10th December 2023 at 10:20 pm

stumbled across your blog and was pleasantly surprised! my wife and I will arrive in London on 6/19/24 in advance of Wimbledon where we’ll be staying from 7/5 though 7/10. we want to sorta do your route in reverse, heading out of London straight away renting a car, and heading out. we have around 2 weeks and want to start heading to Ireleand, then Scotland, then visiting cousins in Durham in northern GB, returning car in London before wimbeldon.

would love to get some advice on that reverse route, forgoing the London stuff until later, but wanting your insights on anything else! thanks in advance!

13th December 2023 at 12:19 am

It’s great to hear from you. So you can do the route either way without any issue. The main thing if you do decide to include Ireland is to be sure to check if the car rental company you choose allows you to take the car on a ferry to Ireland. Some will and some won’t, you’ll just want to confirm before booking. Otherwise I think you have the structure of a good itinerary. You can follow my route and just adjust it to suit your interests and available time. I’d definitely recommend booking in advance for places to stay and the ferries as you are coming at a popular time for travel so things will start to book up. Otherwise, just have a great time and let me know if you have any questions!

13th December 2023 at 2:38 am

Lawrence….thanks so much…great info on the ferry and booking places….do you have a fav booking site for places to stay?

13th December 2023 at 3:37 am

It’s my pleasure! We primarily use Booking.com when we travel because we like the filters. We usually filter by rating (8+) and then depending on the trip things like having free parking (handy for a road trip). Then things like WiFi, laundry, free breakfast, free cancellation, depending on what we are doing. Also like that you can apply the filters to the map view (again, handy for road trips). You can also book apartments. We also use various other sites depending on where we are going, some places have more AirBnB options. In the UK we also book holiday cottages but for a trip like yours which will likely have more shorter stops I’d say hotels or B&Bs are likely to be an easier option as apartments often have the extra overhead of needing to arrange check in and check out times.

Let me know if I can help any further 🙂

Linda Haddock says

2nd December 2023 at 7:38 am

Hello, thank you for this helpful blog! Do you have any recommendations on when, where and what to include for sites for a JRR Tolkien fan?

2nd December 2023 at 8:46 pm

It’s my pleasure. So Oxford would be my main recommendation as it was here that Tolkien studied and worked. Fun side story, a dear friend of mine was Tolkien’s Doctor and knew him well, although he has now passed. Anyway, Tolkien studied at Exeter Collge in Oxford and was also a fellow at Pembroke College and Merton College, so many of the sights in Oxford like the Radcliffe Camera and Ashmolean museum would be of interest. The Bodeleian Library in Oxford (the Radcliffe Camera is part of this) does have the originals of many of his works but these are not usually on display unfortunately.

I hope this helps a bit! Have a lovely time in the UK and do let me know if you need any more input 🙂

Ingrid Ermanovics says

24th May 2022 at 3:45 pm

Hi, Love your blog. I hear that the traffic in July can be daunting and cause very long delays. As such, would you still recommend a private car hire (car rental)? Or have other suggestions to avoid the issue? Thanks!!

24th May 2022 at 4:33 pm

Thanks very much! So in my experience, the main factors that contribute to traffic in the UK are road works, which can happen at any time, and travelling at specific times. For example, when there is a public holiday on a Monday or Friday, this tends to lead to a lot of holiday traffic. So avoiding those dates makes a lot of sense. July is not particularly worse in my experience, it can be a bit heavier, but it’s not normally awful unless you are unlucky and encounter an accident, or there are road works. I would advise against trips on Friday or Sunday afternoons, as this is when the traffic can be quite bad at any time of year as people go away for or come back from the weekends.

I’d also advise using an app like Google maps with real time traffic, and trying to plan your travel times so they don’t align with the busier times of day. In general though, i would still recommend using a car rental even in July 🙂

I hope this helps!

Debbie Hebert says

16th May 2022 at 12:16 am

Hi Laurence and Jessica, this trip looks super fun and we are looking to visit July-Aug of this year starting in Dublin (as the airfare is best to there from our home in New Orleans). Just a few questions. Would you suggest going North or South from Dublin? How many miles is the entire itinerary? Is there is a stretch where we could ditch the rental car and take the train and then pick up another car? And/or if we drop off the car before and after London and train in which cities would be best to do that? Thank you so much!

16th May 2022 at 3:11 pm

Thanks Debbie!

So I’d probably recommend dropping the rental car in Belfast or Dublin and then flying across to Cardiff or Edinburgh, depending which way you go. Many car rental firms don’t allow for rentals to be taken on the ferry, plus you have to pay more to transport a car, so this would likely save you money.

Direction wise in Ireland, it really depends what you want to see. In the Republic of Ireland you have lovely landscapes and places like the Dingle peninsula and Ring of Kerry. If you head north to Belfast (also a lovely city), then you can visit places like the Giant’s Causeway and the Coastal Causeway route.

Putting a mileage total on the entire itinerary is tricky as there are likely to be many detours but I’d say a ballpark of 1500 – 2000 miles seems about right. In terms of areas where you can drop the car and take public transport, a lot of this will depend on what you want to see. If you are happy with primarily cities, then you can easily get around between cities with a train instead of a car. So for example, Edinburgh to York, York to Manchester, Manchester to Bath and Bath to Oxford would all work. Then if there were specific day trips you wanted to do there’s the option to either rent a car for that day, or take a day tour. But if you are thinking of spending more time in the countryside and smaller towns, then a car would be a lot less useful. I’d definitely recommend against taking a car into London, and dropping it off somewhere like Oxford or Reading before taking the train into London.

Farooq Ghouri says

6th May 2022 at 2:56 am

Hi Laurence and Jessica We are visiting UK this summer for two weeks. Your two weeks itinerary is great resource for us. I wonder how we can squeeze Wales in it . Any suggestions will be much appreciated We will be using rental car Sincerely Farooq Ghouri from Chicago USA

6th May 2022 at 9:44 am

Thanks very much! So the southern part of Wales is included in this trip on the return from Ireland. However, if you wanted to add Wales your main option would be to do it as you drive north, or to consider skipping Ireland and to drive back down through Wales to Bath. The second option might be easier as it cuts down having to think about a ferry / flight across to Ireland, but it’s up to you. This itinerary is already very busy, so adding more to it as it exists would be a bit of a challenge in my opinion.

Let me know if I can offer any further advice, and have a great time in the UK!

6th May 2022 at 5:06 pm

Thank you much Laurence I will keep your suggestion in mind when finalizing the itinerary

Heather says

28th April 2022 at 2:35 am

I noticed your recommended the The Resident Victoria and I was wondering if I could ask you a few questions. I will be travelling with 3 people, one of which is a full time wheelchair user. Do you think the room size is adequate for a 5 day visit? Did you happen to notice if the showers were roll in or a wet room with chair? I realize most hotels only have accessible showers and whatnot in certain rooms so will understand if you don’t know. I found your travel blog a month ago and love it. Thanks from Canada

28th April 2022 at 12:01 pm

Hi Heather,

Sure thing. So, the first thing to be aware of is that rooms in central London tend to be quite small, especially if you are used to the size of hotel rooms in North America. Another thing to be aware of is that baths are quite common, and having a shower over the bath rather than a separate stall is also fairly common. So if looking for an accessible room it’s really important to specify that, and it’s always worth checking with the hotel what that actually means.

I would say that none of the rooms in the Resident Victoria would really be suitable for three adults to share for a longer stay, if that was what you were thinking. The superior rooms do have the option for three single beds, but these are not accessible rooms. In general, the rooms are fairly compact and I think a wheelchair user in particular would struggle in their standard rooms.

If you were thinking of separate rooms, some of their King Rooms are accessible so that would be an option. I called the hotel this morning and they confirmed that it is their King rooms which are accessible and the showers in these rooms are fully roll in. The toilets and sinks are also accessible. They can also provide a chair in the shower if you want. However these are definitely rooms for two people.

I hope this answers your question! The property is very well located for sure. Let me know if I can offer any further advice. I also have a full guide to where to stay in London which has a lot more options 🙂

13th April 2022 at 11:47 pm

Hi Laurence,

Was very interesting to read this trip. But it’s more suitable for adults without kids to travell to Ireland within two weeks. Can you please look for following trip plan: We are 2 adults + 2 kids (12 and 10) for 14 days. My daughter likes Harry Potter, so preference on these kind of attractions. So i wanted to divided for following parts: 1. London 5 days –>>> museums, parks and so on. 2. Warner Bros. Studio Tour London 1 day 3. Oxford or Cambridge .. yet not decided… for one day + Windsor Castle 4. Rent a car(or by train) and drive to the north >> York 1 day Manchester + Alton Towers – 1 day 5. Drive to south Birmingham (Cadbury world + other attractions) – 1 day Costwolds area – 1 day Bath + Stonehenge – 1 day Total 12 + 2 days (driving + bufffer for other changes during the trip)

Do you think is it good? What to add or remove? Or continue to Edinburgh and cancel some places in current trip? Thanks in advance Sam

14th April 2022 at 11:23 am

Great to hear from you. I agree, trying to include Ireland on the trip would be challenging with family. I think your itinerary sounds good, spending more time focusing on a smaller number of areas is a good choice. For your options, I think I might suggest Oxford over Cambridge if your daughter likes Harry Potter as there are quite a few filming locations in Oxford (see the Oxford section of our Harry Potter guide here ). I would also probably allocate a whole day to Oxford and maybe do Windsor Castle on one of your days in London. Oxford is very easy to reach by train from London so makes an easy day trip, but the day might feel rushed if you include Windsor as well.

I think otherwise your itinerary sounds good. A car will make things easier for sure, especially for things like exploring the Cotswolds and getting to Alton Towers. These are doable by public transport but it will take up valuable time. I also think focusing on England is a good idea. Depending on how much of a Harry Potter fan your daughter is you might consider stopping at Gloucester as well to see Gloucester Cathedral, which was used for various Hogwarts scenes .It’s a spectacular cathedral and lovely city in its own right as well, easy to see in 2-3 hours between Birmingham and Bath before dipping into the Cotswolds.

Have a great trip – let me know if you have any questions!

Vincent Choo says

12th April 2022 at 11:04 am

Laurence, My family and I ( 4 of us intend to tour Great Britain for 2 weeks before joining our friends in Belfast to continue another 10 days covering the island of Ireland. We intend to travel with a combination of car, train , ferry and air and hope to have your recommendation on which sectors should I use the above modes of transport. The intineary is roughly the same as your 2 weeks ( loop from London and ends there ) Thank You

12th April 2022 at 2:43 pm

Hi Vincent!

This is a great question, and the answer will come down to both budget and your interests.

If you are primarily interested in cities and larger towns, then travelling by rail might be easier for the majority of your trip. You can get between most cities and towns quite easily by train, and if you book well in advance you can also get cheap fares. You can also use a Friends & Family railcard to save even more. Travelling by train has the advantage that you don’t have to worry about car rental costs, fuel costs and finding car parking, the latter of which can be a challenge in many cities. I’d definitely advise against a car in London at the very least.

If you prefer a mix of city sightseeing and countryside, then a car is going to be more useful as most countryside sights and places like the Lake District are going to be a lot easier to get to and around with your own vehicle. I’d just suggest leaving the car out of the London part of the trip, and remembering to think about parking and fuel prices as part of your budget. I think a car might end up being slightly more expensive than public transport, but honestly the car rental market is so turbulent these days it’s hard to know without doing the math.

My recommendation would be to fly to Ireland – low cost flights with budget airlines will likely be the best option, and most car rental companies actually don’t allow for their vehicles to go on a ferry. Then you could pick up a hire car in Ireland on arrival.

It sounds like you have a great trip planned – let me know if I can offer any more input!

Sanchay says

7th April 2022 at 8:05 pm

Hello, Im planning a 2 week trip which shall include England, Wales, Ireland and Scotland during the month of October 2022. Is it feasible to cover all the places in 2 weeks considering that we are a group of 6 adults and 2 children ( 11 and 12 yrs) or shall we skip any of the destinations. We shall use Public transport in London and prefer Self drive cars / Trains / Ferries elsewhere. I also want to know if you could share some ranch stays where in we can stay and enjoy the country side instead of hotels. Awaiting your kind suggestion

Thanks and Regards 🙂

8th April 2022 at 11:04 am

Hi Sanchay,

Thanks for your comment. So I would probably recommend that you focus on maybe a couple of countries so you can enjoy yourself a bit more. I would probably recommend perhaps the mainland UK, as the extra effort required to get across to Ireland will eat into your time with two weeks. So perhaps a trip which includes London and Edinburgh, and then areas like the Lake District and / or Wales. One thing to be aware of is that the weather in October can be a bit variable, so spending more time in the cities might be more appealing rather than the country side where the weather might not be suitable for a lot of outdoor activities. Of course, you might be lucky and get good weather, but this is not guaranteed.

For ranch stays, probably the closest in the UK would be countryside B&Bs. Some farms do have accommodation option, and there are some lovely self catering options in the country as well.

Have a great trip and let me know if you have any further questions!

Derek Bowen says

2nd June 2021 at 5:16 pm

A really good trip, but I would skip Manchester and head right up through Rawtenstall, up through Burnley and Nelson. This would be a really good look at the cotton industry as well a real feel of northern England, as well as the best fish and chips. Then carry on up through Skipton, trying to time market day, and over to York, which is a must.

3rd June 2021 at 12:53 pm

Thank you Derek! For sure, there are so many ways to change this route depending on interests, and your suggestion is a good one 😀

Patrick Russell says

22nd March 2021 at 5:18 pm

This is absolutely amazing itinerary. What would a rough cost be for a trip like this? Minus airfare, and passports.

Thank you, Patrick

22nd March 2021 at 5:23 pm

Thanks Patrick! So it will vary quite a bit depending on your travel style. The main costs on a trip like this are transport, accommodation, food and attraction entry. Accommodation will obviously depend on how comfortable you like to travel, and food will also vary a lot depending on if you prefer fine dining or simpler fare.

To help cost a trip like this I put a guide to the costs of travelling in the UK in a post, which should give you some guidance 🙂

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/cost-travel-uk/

Hope this helps!

Matthew says

8th December 2020 at 2:51 pm

Interesting itinerary. As a British person, rather than a traveller, my comment would be it doesn’t have much of the coast in, though I understand the time constraints. But a trip to the UK with no seaside towns! At least add Brighton, easy to reach from London. Dorset isn’t too far either, and has a fantastic coast. Also, Chester is beautiful and well worth inclusion.

8th December 2020 at 2:52 pm

Hey Matthew,

Great feedback. When I wrote this guide initially it was in response to a specific request, but of course there is so much of the UK that it doesn’t cover for various reasons (including time restraints!). I always encourage folks to use it as a rough guide, but to modify it for their own interests 🙂

Thanks for stopping by!

Tammy Howard says

25th February 2020 at 11:07 pm

Dear Laurence,

Thank you so much for this itinerary. It is fabulous!! We would like to sleep in a castle while on our trip. Are there any that you know of that allow this along this route?

26th February 2020 at 11:20 am

Dear Tammy,

My pleasure! So yes, there are quite a few options along the route, depending on your budget. Some options to consider:

Thornbury Castle – just north of Bristol

Glenapp Castle – just south of the Scotland – Ireland ferry crossing. We’ve stayed here and it’s wonderful

Kilkea Castle Hotel – south of Dublin. We’ve also stayed here.

Cringletie Castle Hotel – about a 40 minute drive south of Edinburgh. Another of our favourites.

Of course, this is just a small selection – there are many more across the UK to choose from, at a range of budgets. One tip when staying in a castle hotel – some of them have built more rooms outside the castle itself. So make sure when booking that you get a room that inside the castle (I think otherwise it sort of defeats the point!).

Have a great trip, let me know if you have any more questions!

Abdiaziz says

29th February 2020 at 8:27 am

How much will I pay if I want to travel next month

29th February 2020 at 10:14 am

Hi Abdiaziz,

March is not too busy a month for travel in the UK, so prices should be reasonable. To figure out your costs for this trip, see our guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK 🙂

Dhaval says

3rd February 2020 at 9:17 am

Hi Laurence, Thanks a lot for this amazing itinerary. We are a group of 4 adults + 4 kids (1Y,3Y,5Y,7Y) and are planning a 15 days trip to the UK. This will be our first time. Can you please assist us with the below queries:-

1. Considering we have small kids, what is the best mode of transport to travel from London to Edinburgh to Dublin? Should we keep one separate day for travelling in our itinerary? We will also have Kids Strollers everywhere we travel. 2. We want to do Day tours from London to Oxford, Cotswold, Stonehenge, Bath etc keeping our base in London. But few of my friends suggested that the Local operators don’t include kids below 5Years and we will be forced to take a rent a car. Any suggestions? 3. Also if we follow your above itinerary, can you guide us the exact cities in which we need to book our apartments/hotels to avoid hassle-free travelling.

Thanks a lot in Advance. Cheers 🙂

3rd February 2020 at 2:45 pm

My pleasure 🙂 I will do my best to help of course. To answer your questions:

1 – From London to Edinburgh I would recommend the train. This takes around 4.5 hours and will be a lot quicker than driving / taking a bus, plus you will have more space for your stroller / bags etc. You could fly too, but as it will take time to check everything in, go through security etc, I think the train will be easier. Just be sure to book your train well in advance to get a good price, and be aware that if you book a ticket in advance, you must take the booked train, the ticket will not work on a different train, even on the same day.

For Edinburgh to Dublin, your only option is realistically to fly.

2 – This is correct, for safety reasons most group tours do not accept children under a certain age, which is often 5. However, you can instead book a private tour. For a group of eight of you this should not work out much more expensive than a normal tour, plus you will be able to customise the itinerary. So I would advise reaching out to private tour operators who should be able to assist.

3 – All the cities are in the itinerary, you would need to stay in whichever ones you want to visit that don’t fall within the day tours you wish to take from London.

I hope this helps – have a great trip and let me know if I can help any further,

Serafina Macdonald says

11th January 2020 at 9:09 pm

Hi there, we are planning a trip to England, Scotland, and Ireland at the beginning of July. We are thinking about 16-18 days. I looked at your itinerary and love your suggestions! My husband does want to spend a half-day in Liverpool and I think we can tweak your itinerary to fit it in and try to do Isle of Skye as well. Since we do have the few extra days at the end of the trip, do you think it would be worthwhile to travel over to the other coast of Ireland to explore that side? (Galway, Aran Islands). Would love some suggestions.

11th January 2020 at 9:18 pm

Hi Serafina!

So Liverpool would definitely be an easy addition to the itinerary. The Isle of Skye is a bit more of a trek, as it’s a five hour drive each way from Edinburgh, so I’d suggest allocating at least 3 days for that, one day each for the drive and one day to actually explore. So do keep that in mind.

For Ireland, absolutely. The west coast is stunning, and if you can find time to head over there I would definitely suggest doing so. There’s a lot to see over there, so the hardest part will be choosing, but certainly the Cliffs of Moher, Dingle Peninsula and Ring of Kerry are some good candidates for your shortlist 🙂

Have a great time, and let me know if you have any more questions!

12th January 2020 at 2:15 pm

Thanks so much! Looking forward to this trip!

3rd December 2019 at 9:40 am

Dear Laurence, This is the first time I visit UK so could you help give a good advice to have plan visit UK during time 24th Dec- 08th Jan

Thanks Duong

3rd December 2019 at 6:11 pm

Thanks for your message. The majority of the information you need should be available on the site, both in this post and in the posts I link to. I am happy to try and help answer any specific questions you might have – is there anything in particular you are worried about?

The main things I would suggest, depending on where you are travelling from, are to plan what you want to see, to plan your accommodation and transport, and to pack properly for winter. Obviously you are visiting over Christmas and New Year, which is a busy time of year, so if you have not booked your accommodation yet you will definitely want to look into that, especially over New Year as that can be a busy time for both travel and accommodation.

Let me know if I can offer any more specific help for your trip,

Hang Tran says

26th November 2019 at 3:59 pm

Hi Laurence, Thank you for your advice and emails. I was able to put together our 2-week itinerary in England. I changed our lodging to London instead of Heathrow and booked different places when we travel around with our Britrail passes. I can’t say thank you enough. It’s very helpful for us. We will stay in London (3 days), Edinburgh (3 days:Edinburgh and York), Bristol for 5 days, Bath for 2 days and travel to other nearby cities (Stonehenge, Oxford, Cardiff) by train to make one-day trip. Is it right time to visit Cardiff in winter? If not, do you have any other places to spend a day? We’re thinking about Liverpool but it takes about 3-hours ride. If so, what should we can see in such a short time in Liverpool? We never ride a train before so we don’t mind riding the train everyday and enjoy the view together.

26th November 2019 at 5:20 pm

I am so pleased to have been able to help you and to hopefully make your trip a memorable one. It sounds like you have a wonderful itinerary planned now.

I would say that Cardiff is fine to visit in winter. Like many cities in the UK, lots of the attractions are indoors, so you can visit at any time of year and have a good time. Obviously you’ll want to dress warmly, but this will be the same all around the UK. Cardiff will definitely be one of the easier places to visit given its proximity. Another option would be Birmingham. I think I would probably not do Liverpool from Bristol – the 3 hour trip each way would be 6 hours on a train, so I don’t think you’d really have enough time to enjoy the city.

Let me know if I can be of any further help! We actually live in Bath too, so maybe we’ll see you 😉

28th November 2019 at 5:30 am

Hi Laurence, Thank you for the suggestion. We will look into Birmingham instead of Liverpool. We might be able to meet you for breakfast or lunch in Bath on Dec 22 or 23. I was able to find a place to stay that we can walk up or down the street to get to Bath Spa. Everything is in walking distance. Thanks to you again.

Sincerely, Hang

28th November 2019 at 7:22 pm

My pleasure – have a lovely trip. Do pop a comment here or send me an e-mail if you have some free time!

Laurel says

9th October 2019 at 7:23 am

Hi, love your itinerary of the UK. It includes much of what we want to see. Howev r, we are a senior couple of nomads from Australia and we are trying to organise a four week trip of the UK and Ireland including the islands off Scotland but we are steam train buffs and have the 10 best day trips on steam trains to try to include. Do you help with itinerary planning to include as many of these as we can but in some sort of order? If not can you head us in the right direction? We don’t need London as we have a couple of days there prior to a cruise of Norway. Is it feasible to do this trip in September and will he days still be long and fairly warm? Thanks in anticipation for your advice.

9th October 2019 at 6:16 pm

Thanks very much! So we don’t offer custom itinerary planning as it’s quite a time intensive process. We’re happy to answer specific questions and help where we can of course. Steam trains aren’t really an area of expertise though!

I can definitely answer your questions about September – I’d say September is a great month to travel. If you are lucky it might still be reasonably warm (recent years have been lovely in September), but you skip the crowds of the summer months and the schools will have gone back as well. September and May are our favourite months to travel. Of course, this is the UK, so rain and cooler weather is certainly possible (although you can get this in July and August as well!), so it’s always best to be prepared with layers of clothing, but you should be fine generally. The days will still be long, light until around 8pm depending on which part of the month you visit 🙂

Have a great trip, and let me know if I can answer any more specifics!

Kevin Ortyl says

19th September 2019 at 6:51 pm

Love the website and your two-week itinerary. Very easy to follow.. So glad we found your site. Need advice please… (Coming from Boston, USA) Thinking of a two-week vacation late August 2020 (family of 4… 2 college age kids) flying into London and out of Dublin. So similar trip you outlined but not returning to Heathrow once in Ireland. Planning on rental car and driving everywhere. Can the one way car rental work in this scenario (London, Scotland, ferry to the Emerald Isle, drop rental at Dublin)? Second Q… if we were to eliminate the Wales back to London segment how would you fill in that itinerary staying in Ireland?

19th September 2019 at 7:20 pm

Thanks very much. So dropping off the car in a different country might be a challenge. Most car rental companies will let you drop the car off in a different part of the same country, but as the Republic of Ireland is separate from the UK, that would likely be a challenge. So your best option is probably to rent the car in the UK, then drop it off at Edinburgh airport and fly to Dublin, then pick up a new rental there.

For your time in Ireland, you have a lot of options! If you are looking for a road trip the Causeway Coastal Route in northern Ireland is a favourite of ours, and the Wild Atlantic Way is also a great drive. Of course there is so much to see in Ireland and Northern Ireland depending on what you are interested in, with both Dublin and Belfast being worth a visit. It would just depend if you wanted to do more city or more country 🙂

Let me know if I can be of any more help – we have quite a few posts on Ireland as well on the site with some ideas!

19th September 2019 at 9:58 pm

Thank you for the reply, and the good information regarding rental cars.

To follow up, once in Ireland probably interested in seeing some of the quaint cities/towns, visit the pubs, little urban culture, castles, etc and those types of places in lieu of say hiking and biking. Hoping of course between destinations to see beautiful countryside and such!

20th September 2019 at 9:02 am

My pleasure 🙂 So I would suggest that driving the Causeway Coastal Route ( https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/causeway-coastal-route-northern-ireland/ ) Might be a good option 🙂

4th September 2019 at 2:13 am

Hi Laurence, I really like the two week trip itenerary. We’ll will be driving and are experienced with that. We’d like to see some worthy gardens along the suggested route. Any ideas?

4th September 2019 at 7:02 pm

Certainly. The gardens at Alnwick Castle are wonderful, as are the gardens at many of the stately homes in the UK (you can see our list of good stately homes in England here ). Not all of them have gardens of course, but that’s a good starting point. Many cities also have botanic gardens, including Edinburgh and Kew Gardens in London, which are well worth the visit.

I hope this helps a little 🙂

Rachel Sales says

16th August 2019 at 5:15 am

Hi! This post gave me lots of ideas. However, can you help me out in modifying this itinerary which will make Edinburgh as the last stop? My flight booking is DXB-LHR, EDI-DXB. I thought it will be nice it it’s an onward journey and not have to go back to my starting point. Thank you in advance!

16th August 2019 at 12:12 pm

Glad to be able to help! So as this itinerary is a loop, it’s a bit challenging to modify it that easily. My suggestion would perhaps be to drop Ireland from your trip, and instead to spend more time in Scotland. So you could follow the itinerary up to Edinburgh, and then add in time exploring more of Scotland before returning to Edinburgh. Let me know your thoughts,

Robin Major says

13th August 2019 at 12:53 am

Hello Lawrence,

I just found and love this site!! I’m trying to plan a 25th wedding anniversary trip for next September (2020) to surprise my hubby.

He’s never been to Europe. I was fortunate enough to get two and half lovely days in London a couple years back courtesy of my employer.

I’m not sure if what I want to do is totally doable though… No driving.. we would do transit and rail… I’m thinking a week in Britian and a week in Scotland. Maybe fly into London, spend two full days exploring the sites.. then I’m sort of lost. We are interested in Castles, love the supernatural aspect of York so that will be a must, definitely want to see Stonehenge.. and as odd as it sounds, my parents did Sherwood Forest and Nottingham on their 25th Wedding Anniversary many years ago so wondering if that would be a recommendation? Just not sure of the logistics for a week in Britian.. where to stay etc.

For Scotland, again, Castles and we are both big Outlander fans so we’ve have to see Loch Ness, Inverness and any and all sites made famous by Outlander. I am thinking a week up there and we fly home from either Glasgow or Edinburgh.

Do you have any suggestions/recommendations on an itinerary for us? I would greatly appreciate any knowledge you wish to share with me.

Thank you so much! Robin

13th August 2019 at 10:19 am

Thanks very much! It certainly would be possible 🙂 I’ve actually written a 10 day UK itinerary by public transport. Whilst the route isn’t exactly what you want, the post does have some useful information to help you plan your trip, especially around booking the trains etc. If you’ve not seen that post yet, it’s here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/10-day-uk-itinerary-public-transport-train-bus/

Regarding your specific itinerary, I would suggest you start in London as you suggest. You could then take a day tour from London out to Stonehenge. This is doable by public transport, but is way easier as a day tour, plus they usually have some extra stops like Bath. You can read our guide to doing that here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/Stonehenge-bath-cotswolds-day-trip-from-london/

So Nottingham is nice (I went to university there), but with limited time I wouldn’t say it was a must do. My suggestion would be to take the train from London to Oxford, and then up to York. A day in each location would work. You are now up to five days in England. Castles are a bit tricky by public transport as many of them are out of cities. I would perhaps suggest extending your time in London and taking the extra day to visit either Windsor Castle or Hampton Court Palace. From York you could head up to Durham which is a beautiful cathedral city.

From Durham the train to Edinburgh is not too far. I’d suggest basing yourself in Edinburgh for at least three days. Two days to explore the city, and then one day to take an Outlander tour. We have specifically done 1 day tour with Rabbies , and thought it was great. We have more suggested day tours from Edinburgh here:

https://independenttravelcats.com/day-trips-from-edinburgh-scotland/

From Edinburgh our recommendation would then be to take the train up to Inverness, from where you can explore more castles, Loch Ness and the Highlands. Again, plenty to do in this area, and there are lots of great day trips to plan. You can see our guide to some of the best here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/day-trips-from-inverness-scotland/

I think that should give you plenty to work with – let me know if you have any more questions!

8th August 2019 at 9:35 pm

I just found this page and so glad I did especially your “Best Stately Homes in England” We will be visiting England and Scotland for 2weeks October 16-29, 2019 and I am excited about your itinerary. We have been to Northern Ireland (once)and Republic of Ireland (4 times) so we can leave those out, so are there any other places you might suggest? My husband has driven every time we have visited Ireland so he can handle a manual transmission. We land at Gatwick Airport and I thought we could head to Edinburgh via a easterly route and return to London via a westerly route. We do not have to travel only motorways but don’t wait too many small country lanes (did plenty of those in Ireland). Any suggestions you could make would be greatly appreciated. Love Manor Houses, Castles, rolling landscape, waterfalls, quaint English market towns or villages, etc. THANKS

9th August 2019 at 8:54 am

Sounds like you have a great trip planned, and I will certainly do my best to help. It sounds like your route is pretty good already, coming down the west side of the UK gives you the chance to pop into the Lake District, explore towns like Chester, and even larger cities like Birmingham. In terms of stately homes, well, I would obviously recommend the majority of those in my post on stately homes. I’d also add Edinburgh Castle of course if you like castles, as well as the more ruined Craigmillar Castle on the outskirts of Edinburgh. Alnwick Castle on the way up through Northumberland is stunning, as are many of the other castles in Northumberland, like Bamburgh and dunstanburgh. For rolling hills and greenery, the Lake District is lovely, but I can also recommend the Hadrian’s Wall area of Northumberland, particularly the area near Housesteads.

For quaint English towns, of course the Cotswolds would be by number one pick. The counties of Kent and Dorset are also good options.

I think that should get you started, let me know if you need some more ideas!

Christine Greentaner says

5th August 2019 at 12:26 pm

Hello!! I stumbled on your site asking google if I could do the this kind of trip and wow, here you are! Unsure of the driving though since we zero experience. However, this two week itinerary gives us something to start thinking about. Thank you so much!! Christine

7th August 2019 at 2:52 pm

Hi Christine!

Driving in the UK is definitely a bit different, especially if you are coming from a country where they drive on the right hand side. Also, if you’re coming from the USA, be aware that most cars in the UK have manual transmissions, so when you rent a car if you are not used to driving a manual you should specify an auto. I have a guide to driving in the Uk which you might also find useful 🙂

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/tips-for-driving-in-the-uk/

Let me know if you have any questions, and have a great trip!

Danie marais says

11th July 2019 at 8:54 pm

What will it cost for 2 adults

12th July 2019 at 4:17 am

Hi Danie – this really depends on your travel style – you can see a guide to how much travel in the UK costs here for some estimates: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/cost-travel-uk/

Margaret says

9th July 2019 at 6:29 am

HI , Just wanted to ask. I am getting a little a little worried,as our trip is getting closer and closer. Your site has helped so much. Does this sound ok to do. Day 1 arrive late afternoon explore Paddinton. Day 2 & 3 follow your 2 day guide of london sites. Day 4 train to oxford, free 2 hour tour. free time to explore oxford Day 5 train back to oxford ,pick up car. Drive to Cotswold explore.. Drive on up to peak district stay over night . 1 night Day 6 explore peak district , drive to Manchester and york .explore. Now I am unsure to travel to the Lake district Or follow onto Alnwick. as some people say not to miss out on the lake district. We dont have enought time to cut back over to Alnwick unsure . We arrive in paddington on the 20th want to leave Edinburgh 31st. So take into account at least 2 night in Edinburgh and head onto Belfast. We will then explore Belfast and Dublin for 2 weeks as we have friends there. follow onto wales Bath but we do want to stay in Southampton for two days once again friends. Can you get to Heathrow airport from Southampton We have 5.5 weeks for this trip but I do want to spend time with friends in Belfast and Dublin. I am so over whelmed .

10th July 2019 at 5:43 am

Hi Margaret!

First, I’m delighted we’ve been able to help 🙂

Your comment covers a few points so I will try to help where I can. For your itinerary, the first six days look good, the only feedback I would offer is that trying to do the Peak District, Manchester and York in one day is likely going to be too much. Even Manchester and York in one day is quite a bit. York would need at least four hours to fully enjoy it, so I might suggest skipping Manchester unless you are particularly invested in it.

For your Lake District dilemma, I can’t really answer this for you. Everyone has a different idea as to what is “unmissable”, so it really depends on your priorities and interests. The Lake District is certainly very pretty, but so is much of the UK 😉

From Southampton you can definitely get to Heathrow airport. It takes around 2 hours by train. It’s not a direct train though, so you do have to change, but it shouldn’t be too difficult. If you would prefer a direct route, I believe National Express operates a coach service between the two locations.

I think for the rest of your trip you might want to reach out to your friends and ask for their advice in terms of what to see and do. I would try to relax and enjoy yourself instead of trying to see everything and becoming overwhelmed if you can. Travel is definitely a bit of work, but ultimately it is supposed to be fun. I always find that the less planned adventures are the more fun ones. So certainly come up with a framework, but don’t spend too much time worrying about it to the tiniest detail, as it will likely detract from the enjoyment.

22nd July 2019 at 4:35 am

Thank you Laurence, Your advice is so helpful. I have added days, so we can get the most out of our trip 2 days in the Peak District, Manchester and 1 day for York. Now I am on the end part of our trip and once again would like some advice. : After spending 18 days exploring Ireland. We will be catching the ferry to Wales. 20th Fishguard pick up car, early afternoon explore the country driving towards Cardiff, Bristol Question : Unsure as to time length of time needed

I was thinking, see Cardiff, then drive towards Bristol arrive around tea time. sleep overnight and have full day to explore Bristol. 21st after exploring Bristol drive towards Bath. arrive around tea time, find somewhere to sleep for 2 nights (21st and 22nd) 22nd full day to explore Bath. 23 th drive toward Stonehenge, Amesbury, drive onto southamption return Car

24th southamption .explore Southamption see family member. we need to be at Hearthrow airport on the 26th at 9:20 flight take off , My next question is , Should I return to paddington for the 25th so I can get the express train to airport , Is my flight to early to return from southamption. Once again . please guide me. Margaret

22nd July 2019 at 6:03 pm

Hi Margaret,

My pleasure! I will try to help again. Your timings for Bristol / Bath etc seem reasonable. They are very close together, my only advice is to avoid travelling at rush hour (4pm – 6pm), as it will make your journey much longer due to the traffic.

For your second question, in theory you could get from Southampton to Heathrow in time, but it’s around a 2 – 2.5 hour journey. You’d want to check train times for the day you are going, but the earliest trains are around 5am based on my research, so you would get to Heathrow around 7.30am. So yes, it’s possible, but it depends how happy you are with an early start and also the risk of any train delays. Up to you, but personally I avoid early mornings at all costs, so would personally probably just find a hotel near Heathrow 😉

Diana Cottrell says

1st July 2019 at 1:57 am

Loved seeing your site. Very helpful since I’m trying to plan a driving vacation for my husband and myself and really didn’t know were to start. I have some questions but will start with only one. We were in London last year but I could go again. Loved it. Hubby sick and had a different feeling. Would it be hard for someone from the US to land at Heathrow and rent a car…then drive to Windsor right after landing? Is it far enough out of London to get comfortable with driving on a different side of the road?

1st July 2019 at 10:18 pm

So, funny story, after passing my UK driving test the first thing I did was rent a car and drive out of Heathrow! I’m not sure I’d exactly recommend it, you’d be driving onto one of the busiest motorways in the UK (our equivalent of a freeway) which might be quite stressful. It’s possible of course, and I’m sure many people do it, but I would advise caution. Also, make sure you specify you want an automatic as most cars in the UK are manual 🙂

3rd July 2019 at 12:01 am

Thanks for the information. Think we’ll skip Heathrow. How would landing in Edinburgh, then heading up through Scotland and back down England (maybe to Bath). Then going up through York and returning back to Edinburgh to return car.

3rd July 2019 at 2:57 pm

That would likely work quite well. My only advice, if you plan on spending time in Edinburgh, is not to pick up the hire car until you leave, as you won’t need it in the city and you’ll just be paying for car rental and parking for no good reason – the city is very walkable.

6th July 2019 at 11:11 pm

Thanks so much. Will start planning.

Amanda says

23rd June 2019 at 5:59 pm

This is such a great detailed itinerary! We are planning to get a rental car in Cambridge and then driving to Scotland from there, so some of these places we will definitely have to visit! I do have one question, about renting a car. Is there a boarder crossing fee or any other type of fee the rental company could charge to go from England to Scotland? We are planning to do a one-way trip so I know there is a fee for that, but in terms of crossing between the two countries is there a fee? When I read about the boarding crossing fee it was unclear to me if that is only if we leave the UK?

Thank so much!

23rd June 2019 at 6:02 pm

Thanks very much! There’s no fee or anything like that for crossing into Scotland, it’s not really a border like that. It’s all part of the UK, so it’s one country.

Opal joiner says

18th June 2019 at 1:37 pm

Hi Do I need to purchase a London pass and a heritage pass? Or just one pass?

18th June 2019 at 7:05 pm

It depends what you want to see and where you are travelling, but for London the London Pass will cover the majority of the attractions 🙂 I definitely recommend checking what they cover before purchasing though 🙂

Chris Ryan says

17th June 2019 at 8:44 am

From an English persons point of view this is an excellent itinerary. It would be good to include the Lake District and Snowdonia but to cover all this in two weeks would be a nightmare and far too much time on the road. The average Brit would allow at least a month for the whole trip. If only two weeks available I would suggest you save Ireland for another time, it’s sacrilage not to explore more of that country, and maybe see more of the west of Scotland instead.

17th June 2019 at 11:06 am

Thanks very much 🙂 I agree, I was actually born in Snowdonia and that part of the world is wonderful. Have spent many happy weekends camping in the Lakes as well. The itinerary was in response to a specific request – we normally encourage folks to slow down where possible and spend more time seeing and less time travelling, but unfortunately many people don’t have much leave to play with and want to try and see as much as possible 🙂

Lillie says

15th June 2019 at 2:56 pm

Hi! So glad to have stumbled upon your site, as I am planning this trip to the UK in October, and I didn’t even know where to begin. I like the idea of doing all the traveling by road ourselves since we’ll be traveling with our baby who will be 9 month old at the time. I was thinking 10 days, including Ireland, but would you consider that possible? We are really interested in doing the whiskey distillery tours in Scotland and anything and everything related to Harry Potter. We’re also interested in visiting landmarks like the cliffs and stonehenge. We’re usually good at squeezing in a lot in our vacations, but this will be the first time we travel with our son, so I don’t want to set ourselves up for failure either. Any advice on what to cut out or if we need to lengthen the trip?

15th June 2019 at 8:38 pm

So, first off, I have to say that we’re not really experts on travelling with children as we don’t have any of our own. So any advice I offer you is based on what friends and other readers have shared with us about the logistics of travelling with a young person. Of course, everyone’s experience will also be different.

Generally, most folks say that you definitely need to slow down when travelling with young children, as you have to factor in things like feeding, changes and so on. This will definitely vary though depending on age and individual personalities 😉

That said, you are trying to do a great deal in 10 days. Scotland and England are around a 6 – 7 hour drive apart, and if you want to get up into the Highlands you’re looking at another few hours. To then add Ireland would make it more of a challenge for sure. It’s not impossible of course, but it would definitely be rushed. It might be that you would be best off focusing on Ireland and Scotland on this trip, perhaps five days in each, rather than trying to see everything and just having a stressful time. Alternatively, add 3 or 4 days and include some time in England 🙂

I hope this helps a bit!

Ashok Agarwal says

15th June 2019 at 6:01 am

Wow. I looked up the WWW for a 2 week itinerary for the UK and am glad I clicked on your site, from the numerous options that sprang up. The information contained here is so so exhaustive. Not only did I get a fantastic plan but ab amazing read, too. We are planning our first visit to the UK in October and are going to follow your tips to the T. You guys are fantastic. Thanks.

15th June 2019 at 11:04 am

Thanks very much Ashok! Much appreciated 🙂

9th June 2019 at 9:56 am

Dear Laurence!

Thank you SOOOOO much for your inspirational itinerary and all other articles you provide here. They’re great help!

We are going to spend 15 days in UK in August and this is cause we’ve planned to take our son to Warner Bros HP Studio as we are all massive HP fans :). We’ll start and finish in London, though initially we want to hire a car at the airport and start a trip and spend couple of days in London in the end.

Could you kindly give us some advice / decide whether it is possible, to plan a trip considering these simple priorities: 1) we’d love to see Scotland with its green hills, waterfalls etc. 2) we would really like to visit Snowdonia 3) I guess Stonehenge is sth 8-year-old traveler to England must see 4) I personally have dreamt all my life too see PUFFINS (I mean – free puffins) 5) we can skip Irelnad, no problem 😉

I must admit – reading about UK – I am getting a bit lost in huge amount if options and sites one must visit, so I’d be grateful for some advice.

10th June 2019 at 10:57 am

My pleasure 🙂

So my first tip, if you haven’t already booked the Harry Potter Studio Tour is to do it as soon as possible as it books out well in advance 🙂 I also have a guide to visiting which you might have already seen, but just in case you haven’t, it’s here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/taking-a-harry-potter-studio-tour-everything-you-need-to-know/

Then, on to the question of your itinerary. Assuming two days in London, that gives you around 12 – 13 days to play with. I would suggest you spend them as follows. Given that you are Harry Potter fans I’m also including some HP filming locations you might enjoy 😉

Day 1 – head to Oxford, overnight here. Lots of awesome history, plus lots of Harry Potter filming locations to explore. Day 2 – head to Bath via Stonehenge Day 3 – head up to Snowdonia. Will be a bit of a drive, but worth it. I’d advise a couple of days in Snowdonia to do some hiking and exploring the towns, castles etc. The roads are slower here so it will take longer go get around

Day 5 – Head across to York Day 6 – Drive up to Alnwick Castle, another HP filming location. Then continue on to Edinburgh. Day 7 & 8, Edinburgh. Lots to see, lovely castle. Where Rowling wrote many of the HP books. Note the Edinburgh festival will be on so the city will be very busy. If you decide to stay in Edinburgh, you need to book now. Also, if you want to see puffins, the Isle of May just near Edinburgh is one of the best places to get up close to them. You need to book a trip, which you can do here: https://seabird-centre.seafari-edinburgh.co.uk/forth-ferry-and-isle-of-may

Day 9 – head across to Loch Lomond and the Trossachs. Overnight here or in Oban Day 10 – head up to Fort William / Glencoe. You can ride the HP train from here, or go see the viaduct at least Day 11 – head down to Glasgow, overnight Day 12 – drive down to Liverpool, overnight Day 13 – return to London.

I would say that would be a good way to do it! We have lots more info on Harry Potter sites if you are interested: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/london-harry-potter-locations/ https://independenttravelcats.com/guide-top-harry-potter-sites-in-edinburgh-scotland-jk-rowling/ https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/harry-potter-filming-locations-uk/ https://independenttravelcats.com/harry-potter-filming-locations-in-scotland/

10th June 2019 at 8:52 pm

Thank you a lot for your advice! The plan sounds great and we are definitely going to follow it step by step :)))

with best regards!

7th June 2019 at 9:00 am

Hi, what a great article! However, do you have any tips for hire car? Are there any fees/ extra charge or need to notice the supplier that the road trip route is involve Wales, Ireland and Scotland?

7th June 2019 at 8:37 pm

Thanks very much!

For driving in Wales and Scotland it won’t matter because they are part of the united Kingdom, so it’s still the same country.

The republic of Ireland however is a separate country, plus you have to take a ferry to get there. So that would be something you would need to check with the rental agency.

S. Steinback says

26th May 2019 at 9:16 am

Hi, my daughter and I are leaving mid August to the UK for 2 weeks. We are planning to start our trip in London. Then wanted to see Brighton, Cornwall, Wales and Scotland. We also want to see Bath and Oxford too. Is this doable using the train? We are unsure of how we should book our traveling using train, car or bus. Can you provide and manageable itinerary and recommendations on how we should travel from each place on a 2 week trip?

26th May 2019 at 11:04 am

Hi Sabrina,

So you should be able to see most of what you want to see by train. As an example, I’d suggest:

2 days in London 1 day in Brighton (train to Brighton takes about an hour, so can be done as a day trip from London or overnight) 1 day in Oxford (1 hour train from London to Oxford, overnight in Oxford) 1 day in Bath (1 hr 40 minute train from Oxford to Bath, overnight in Bath) 2 days in Cornwall (around 3 hours by train from Bath to Cornwall. You might want to take a tour in Cornwall as there is less public transport to get around) 3 days in Wales (train from Cornwall to Cardiff is around 3 – 4hours, but then you will have to plan how to get around Wales. Again a tour might be easiest) 3 days in Scotland (you can either fly from Cardiff to Glasgow / Edinburgh, or take the train, but the train will take around 8 hours)

I’d also suggest looking into Rabbie’s Trail Burners . They do a number of tours from London which might suit what you want to do and save you the hassle of planning. These cover the majority of the destinations you want to visit.

I hope this helps a bit with your planning!

Ed Hyland says

17th April 2019 at 12:01 am

Thankyou for your guide it was really helpful I am living in Argentina and j am planning on bringing Argentinian tourists to Wales and central England on a tour of castles and important historical sites .I plan on bringing groups of around 10 people and using a rented mini bus to move around. Do you have any helpful tips as this will be our first tour ,we are planning on visiting early September All the best .Ed,x

17th April 2019 at 10:56 am

My pleasure. So I don’t have any experience of running this kind of trip, so it’s tricky to give very specific advice. I am sure you have considered things like insurance and liability and so on, as well as any other legal requirements involved with running a tour.

THe only tips I have would be around admission to sights – there are usually group discounts available for attractions that you might be able to take advantage of, although you might need to call in advance to arrange these. I’d also advise to definitely book your accommodation in advance as you have a larger group.

Otherwise, I hope you have a great trip!

12th April 2019 at 12:04 am

I was planning this itinerary since I saw and had 15 days in the region. After more research I am now wondering what it takes to get a rental car from London to Ireland and back? Do you use the same car the entire trip, or would you switch cars at the water crossings in order to not have to pay to ferry the car across? Also I’ve heard rental agencies in England don’t really allow their rentals (or at least coverage) in Ireland? And yet another concern is time, I keep hearing that driving over there is quite a bit slower going than say the US, or by train, would this itinerary still give enough time to enjoy the locations or would it be quick stops and rushed in order to get to the next place? Sorry a lot of questions, just trying to decide if I need to break the trip up to just one or two countries. Thanks. And love you blogs and all the information and amazing photography.

12th April 2019 at 11:46 am

So it is certainly possible to take a hire car on the ferry, it just depends on the hire car company, and some of them charge a fee for doing so. Here’s an example of the Enterprise UK policy: https://www.enterprise.co.uk/en/help/faqs/driving-across-borders.html

Obviously you also then have to pay the ferry fee for the hire car as well. So an easier option to be honest is just to fly, for example to take a flight from Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin. You would drop off the hire car in Edinburgh and pick up a new one in Belfast.

I appreciate this might be a bit of hassle, so certainly adjusting the itinerary so you skip Ireland is another option. In this case, I’d suggest either spending more time in Scotland, or coming down the west coast of the UK, visiting the Lakes and Wales.

The roads in the UK are definitely a bit busier and can also be slower than roads in the USA. This itinerary is definitely doable, but I’m always a fan of slowing down and seeing more, so that is a good option too 🙂

Let me know if you have any more questions!

David Cameron says

11th April 2019 at 1:56 pm

“You’ve packed up every possible solution in this one blog. I’m over the moon! I really am! How much would this trip cost, approximately? And if I’m going on this trip, Ireland will definitely be included coz from the moment I saw P.S I love you and Leap Year movie, I’ve been dreaming of visiting those places. Thank you. Thank you so much, Laurence !”

11th April 2019 at 2:04 pm

Thanks very much! So it’s hard to give an exact price as it will depend on your travel style. The best option is to cross reference this post with our guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK, which will let you come up with a budget based on your travel style 🙂

Have a great trip, and let me know if you have any more questions!

Usha Gupta says

10th April 2019 at 6:02 pm

Hi, we are travelling to London for a holiday from India. My 2 sons (29 & 27) and I are planning on spending 2 weeks in London and Wales. 13th-18th in London 19th-21st in Wales 22nd-26th in London Please advice how best to spend our holidays? We do not want to visit any of the normal places as we have seen n visited them all. What are the best places in wales to see and visit? We have not been to wales. Is it safe to take a road rrip from London to wales? Are 3 days in wales enough to get around? Pl advice

10th April 2019 at 6:52 pm

Well, there’s a huge amount to do and see in London beyond all the normal tourist things that you have likely already done. I can advise visiting Greenwich for example if you have not been out there already, and perhaps some of the palaces out of the city, like Kensington or Hampton Course. Sometimes we like to pick up the London Pass and visit some of the many attractions we’ve not been to before!

Wales is lovely but it is quite big so you will want to consider visiting a region. My favourite part of Wales is the northern part, including the Snowdonia national park and towns like Caernarfon, but there are many nice regions and places to visit. If you want to see more you will likely want a few more days in Wales.

It is certainly safe to take a road trip from London to Wales, of course, I can’t guarantee your safety, but it is no less safe than travel anywhere else in the UK 🙂

I hope this helps – have a great trip!

Usha gupta says

14th April 2019 at 3:24 am

Ty for you advise. We decided to spend all our time in London and do day trips, theatre etc.

14th April 2019 at 11:46 am

My pleasure. Enjoy!

Darlene Williams says

24th March 2019 at 6:10 pm

Lovely ideas here! My Granddaughter and I did a trip last summer to the Cotswolds, London and Paris. I’m thinking of a trip with my Granddaughter (18) in 2020 and would like to base myself in the Lakes District or Wales and take in Ireland and Scotland in a 2 week trip. Since I’ve been there I’ve decided I could probably drive it myself or possibly rent cars when needed and travel via train/bus/tours between Ireland & Scotland. I’m guessing the Highlands is probably out of reach for a 2 week trip? I would welcome your knowledge and suggestions. Thank you, Darlene

25th March 2019 at 3:44 pm

Thanks very much Darlene!

I would definitely recommend hiring a car for the Lakes – it’s a more remote part of the UK, and there are fewer public transport options, both for getting there, and for getting around. I would say that it would make for a good base, but just to be aware that the roads are not very fast in either the Lake District or Wales, so it can take a bit of time to get from place to place.

The Highlands would be achievable, but it would involve a great deal of driving, and if you wanted to head up there i would suggest that as a standalone trip, perhaps flying to Inverness (or overnight train from London), and then renting a car from there 🙂

Do let me know if I can provide any more specific information to help you plan!

Deep Shah says

22nd March 2019 at 5:43 am

Hello Laurence and Jessica,

It has been a pleasure reading about all your experiences in and around UK. I am planning to visit UK between April 22 and May 1. I am planning to start my trip from Edinburg cover a bit of scotland and than move on and end my trip in London.

Here is my itinerary Inverness (23 April) –> Isle of Skye (24 April) –> Fort William (25 April) –> Edinburgh (26 April) –> Jedburgh (27 April) –> York (28 April) –> Cambridge (29 April) –> Cotsworld (30 April) –> London (1 May)

Do you think this is doable? Or any particular section is too aggressive? Your help will really help me plan this better.

22nd March 2019 at 10:00 am

This is in theory do-able, but you will be spending a lot of time driving. From Inverness to the Isle of Skye is a 2.5 hour drive for example, and then there’s a lot to see and do on the island which will also require driving. If you are ok with lots of time driving then yes, this is doable, I just wanted to be sure you knew 🙂

24th March 2019 at 12:35 pm

Thanks for the reply. Yes, I am aware that we will have a lot of driving. But thats ok with me. Thanks again for your time. I have made the reservations to follow this itinerary. Will let you know how it goes.

Thanks for sharing all the information on your website.

24th March 2019 at 12:38 pm

My pleasure – have a great time and do let us know how it goes! You can drop in here or in our facebook group 🙂 https://www.facebook.com/groups/travelloversandphotography/

Omker Mahalanobish says

21st March 2019 at 5:22 pm

Thanks for your detailed itinerary. Looks exciting. By the way, could you please let me know, what should be the expected cost for the said trip? Further : I dont want to drive. Me and my wife would be travelling, and we would rather prefer a chauffer driven cab.

Thanks, Omker

21st March 2019 at 5:27 pm

I have a guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK here: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/cost-travel-uk/

However, if you want to travel with a private guide, this will generally cost in the region of £500 – £800 per day for the car / driver guide, and then you would need to add accommodation expenses and so on on top of that. We recommend Robina Brown for this sort of trip: http://driverguidetours.com/

Heather Reid says

20th March 2019 at 5:20 am

This site is the most perfect one for my needs. I am a solo traveler female aged 74 and I wish my 75th Birthday be spent on the next trip. If there be another solo person I would be happy to meet up before departure….male or female.

20th March 2019 at 12:49 pm

Thanks Heather – have a great trip, and we hope you find someone to travel with!

Phillip Armanas says

5th March 2019 at 12:20 am

Stumbled over your website while looking for ideas for a two week trip to the UK, glad I did. You’ve got a fantastic itinerary which includes a number of destinations my wife and I had in mind already. We are a retired couple, living in Australia six months of the year, and Atlanta, Georgia the other six months. This gives us great flexibility in travel terms, both in SE Asia and from the USA to many places including UK/Europe. A question I have is whether you have done any family history work on any of your travels? My ancestry is Scottish in the mid-1800s when my great-great-grandfather arrived into Port Adelaide, Australia. As yet we have been unable to track him accurately back into Scotland, but his surname is from a very ancient clan that can be traced back to the 13th century in Fife county. Have you any tips on places I might visit to pursue my elusive ghosts? Phill & Patti

5th March 2019 at 1:35 pm

Hi Phill & Patti!

We’re delighted you have found our content useful : ) So this isn’t something we have personally done, however I have some resources that might be helpful:

http://www.scottishgenealogyresearch.com/ https://www.visitscotland.com/see-do/research-your-ancestry/steps/ https://www.nrscotland.gov.uk/research/family-history https://www.nrscotland.gov.uk/research/local-family-history-centres

It helps if you know the person’s name you are researching and where they lived before leaving Scotland. If you know this, you can look for a local research center or records office or clan center. The Visit Scotland link above is a good place to start. The Scottish Genealogy Research is a professional service that will do research for you for a fee.

Good luck, and have a great trip!

Ronald Rieder says

15th February 2019 at 1:22 am

My wife and I would like to take your “ideal itinerary” beginning Sept. 30, 2019. Is there anyone or any group that we could join?

17th February 2019 at 3:56 pm

So this itinerary is a self guided tour for those wanting to drive themselves. However, we appreciate not everyone wants to do that, and we’ve put some suggested tours that will allow you to do a similar trip but in a group tour format. My suggestion for that would be to focus on England and Scotland, and to take this small group tour followed by this five day tour of the Scottish Highlands and Skye .

I hope this helps – let me know if I can offer any more advice!

Cass Baron says

11th February 2019 at 2:19 am

Laurence and Jessica, We are from Utah, United States and have never traveled abroad (except a short trip to Canada and a Western Caribbean cruise). It has been our dream to come to England and retrace our family history roots. We were looking for trip ideas that covered the areas for both a historical trip as well as a family roots trip. We found your site and loved everything that you have written about. We like the 2 week itinerary but don’t want to do the Ireland and Wales portion. We would like to include Nottingham and Hastings areas, do you have any suggestions to add these in for the same amount of time. We are planning on this May. Thanks!

11th February 2019 at 7:40 am

Certainly. I’d recommend Hastings first, then heading from there along to Stonehenge and Bath, then the Cotswolds and Oxford. From there, start heading north, with Nottingham your next stop, before continuing with the itinerary. You could even drop the car off in Edinburgh and fly out from there if you didn’t want to drive back down to London 🙂

I hope this helps – let me know if you have any more questions!

Lashaun says

5th February 2019 at 11:42 pm

Hello. If we skip the Ireland portion where should we extend our time or add another destination for the 2 week adventure? Also we’d like to see a football game, suggestions for city (Manchester, Liverpool?), tickets etc? thank you!

6th February 2019 at 10:36 am

I’d say you could extend by visiting the Lake District and northern Wales, or by heading further north into Scotland, where there’s lots to see. You definitely won’t have trouble finding places to see!

For football, if you don’t have a particular affiliate with a team, then Manchester will likely be a good option as they have the largest stadium. Tickets can be bought online in advance for any of the teams from their official websites, just be aware that they can sell out so you’ll want to book well in advance to be sure of getting a spot.

I hope this helps! have a great trip 🙂

Steve Geller says

2nd February 2019 at 3:10 am

Hi there, Curious if this itinerary, or part of it, could be done in a motorhome (midsize RV) for a family of 2 adults and 2 kids. I’ve never been to most of these places, outside of some brief time in London and Dublin. For itineraries like these where there is a lot of moving around, I like the idea of a motorhome vs going from hotel to hotel (or apt to apt). Thanks!

3rd February 2019 at 11:45 am

So yes, it would be possible to do this is a motorhome. However, I’d probably advise modifying the itinerary fairly substantially, especially the city parts. Most UK cities don’t have centrally located motorhome camping locations, and the streets tend to be fairly narrow, which can make driving and parking a motorhome very challenging. I would instead suggest, if you wanted to do a motorhome holiday in the UK, to look at a driving route like the NC500 (see our camping itinerary for the NC500 here ), or adjusting this route so it visits more of the countryside parts, like the Cotswolds, Peak District, Lake District and Northumberland.

Let me know if we can answer any more questions!

Iskandar Zulkifly Bin Ali says

29th January 2019 at 10:05 pm

Hello there ! finding this website was such a blessing for me! i am a student who wishes to travel around UK for 2 weeks before i go outside UK ( around Europe for a month ). my only problem is, i am studying in london therefore i’m gonna skip london from this amazing itinerary, and am also skipping Scotland cuz i went there last Dec already. which will give me extra days to fill in to make it 2 weeks. would you please help me to suggest places to fill in between the itinerary ? ps; i really really want to see Jurassic coast and cambridge and watergate bay. where should i put these places in terms of best route wise?

thank you in advance for your time !! you got a follower on your ig !

30th January 2019 at 7:33 pm

Hi Iskandar!

Thanks for your lovely comment and following on IG! We’ve actually just recently visited Cambridge and written a detailed guide to the city, which will be live on the blog in the next few weeks 🙂

To answer your question, first I have to assume you are driving. If not, this might have to change a bit to accommodate public transport. But I would say I would go from London to Cambridge, then up to the Peak District, Manchester and York. You could then go across to the Lake District if you wanted, then across to Holyhead and to Ireland (if you wanted to visit Ireland). Then south wales, Oxford and the Jurassic coast.

I hope that works for you 🙂 Have a great trip!

HANNAH JOHNSON says

29th January 2019 at 3:07 pm

This has been an amazing help! If possible, I did want to ask about more recommendations as far as castles/history goes. This is a very close itinerary for what I think we want to do, but I was wondering if you had any more info on what I could add/take away from this list in order to do more of that. Also, we will be departing from the atlanta, GA airport, and returning back to (or starting from) england isnt entirely necessarily. I definitely agree and would take your advice of ending in dublin and returning from there or wales, but im basically trying to avoid flying/ferrying more than need be. What would be your recommendation for doing everything in the UK in one vehicle and then only crossing into ireland once? if that makes sense

30th January 2019 at 7:38 pm

So there are a lot of great castles in the UK, and it’s hard to travel anywhere without finding history! Some of my favourite castles are in Scotland and the Northumberland area, and you’ve also got Hadrian’s wall up there. But York has all the Viking history too, and then cities like Oxford or Cambridge have more from the middles ages, Bath has the Roman empire.. So there’s really no shortage of history to find.

If it was me though, I’d spend a bit more time exploring some of the castles in Northumberland like Alnwick, Bamburgh and Dunstanburgh, as well as some in Scotland.

If you want to do everything in the UK that would be possible, just continue from Oxford to Bath and Cardiff, and then head north from there to York. You might want to bypass Manchester in order to get more of the history you are interested in as it’s more of a town that had it’s heyday with the industrial revolution, which might be a bit too recent history for your interests. You could instead add Warwick, which has a popular castle and a lovely town centre.

Have a great trip and let me know if I can be of any more help!

Hannah says

30th January 2019 at 8:25 pm

For sure! Thank you so much.

Maribel says

17th January 2019 at 4:13 am

Hi, I am planning a 2-week trip to Great Britain flying from Mexico City to London. Your post is very helpful. My trip HAS to include the Isle of Man but I do want to go to Edinburgh and Ireland. What do you think would be the best route? Thanks for your amazing post!

17th January 2019 at 6:37 pm

Hi Maribel!

Great question, and the first time anyone has asked me about the Isle of Man, which I have to admit, I haven’t been to!

There are direct ferry connections to the Isle of Man from Belfast, Dublin, Lancaster and Liverpool.

So assuming you want to do a fairly similar route, mug suggestion would be to follow the general outline of this trip, but take the ferry from Dublin to the Isle of Man, and then on to Liverpool, instead of from the southern end of Ireland to Fishguard. I think that’s the most logical option.

There are other option too – you could go London -> Oxford -> Liverpool -> Isle of Man -> Dublin -> Belfast -> Cairyan -> Edinburgh -> London.

So up to you really! Have a great trip, and let us know if you have any more questions!

Maribel Felix says

17th January 2019 at 6:40 pm

Muchas Gracias! I appreciate you advice very much. I will send you an update of my trip on my way back to Mexico.

17th January 2019 at 9:50 pm

Please do Maribel – we love to hear back from people on how their trips go, and incorporate feedback into our content to help everyone!

16th December 2018 at 12:15 am

Hello! I am planning a 28 day trip in in May 2019. What would you recommend to fill in the extra days? Thank you so much! And thank you for sharing such a lovely itinerary!

16th December 2018 at 11:49 am

Hi Sara! It’s hard to give a precise answer without knowing your interests, but if it was me I would extend my trip up into the northern half of Scotland, perhaps spending 7-10 days driving the North Coast 500, visiting the Isle of Skye and seeing the highlands. You could also head out to the some of the other islands, like Lewis. May is a great time to head up into that part of Scotland.

Other options include Wales or Cornwall, or extending your time in Ireland. There’s so much to see and do, even 28 days will be filled easily!

Nathaniel says

14th December 2018 at 7:57 pm

Could I use this itinerary for a school project. You will be credited and cited, obviously. Thank you if yes and thanks anyway if no. This was fun to read, regardless of your reply Thank you again, Nathaniel

14th December 2018 at 11:43 pm

Hi Nathaniel,

Thanks for asking! Could you e-mail me about this so I get more of an idea of the use? It’s [email protected] 🙂

9th December 2018 at 8:26 am

We are planning a 3 week trip to UK (2 weeks) and Amsterdam (1 week).. We will fly to Amsterdam from London. We were looking at your 2 week itinerary and wanted to ask what would you suggest instead of Ireland, We only want to visit London, Wales and Scotland start at London and return to London. Family with kids who like a bit of adventure, culture so interested in castles, nature etc. Also would like to visit Whisky distilleries preferably Glenfiddich and Aberlour. Also we will be hiring a car in London and return there. Would really appreciate your suggestions.

9th December 2018 at 10:37 am

So my suggestion would be to do a loop from London, similar to that I’ve described here, but instead of going across to Ireland, to head down the west coast of the UK, and then visit the Lake District and Wales on your way down.

In terms of distilleries, certainly, Aberlour and Glenfiddich are achievable from Edinburgh, but you are looking at a three hour drive each way. So you might prefer to visit a closer distillery like Deanston, which is also right next to Doune Castle, which I’m sure your kids will also enjoy 🙂

Hope this helps a bit!

Navtej says

22nd October 2018 at 11:18 am

Hi, a very helpful article. As I plan my next year travel to Europe after a gap of 15 years…it’s a god send. I propose to spend a few days in Amsterdam-Bruges and then fly to London. Here I catch up with another couple and there 12 year old daughter and plan to drive to Scotland and Ireland. We have a total of 10 / 11 days for this.

Am thinking will cut Wales from my itinerary and which other place would u recommend I skip ?

Many thanks

Navtej from New Delhi, India

PS another slighlty unrelates question : If I fly into London should I take a flight into Amsterdam and the train back from Bruges or is this complicated and expensive?

22nd October 2018 at 8:22 pm

It’s hard to give specific recommendations as to what to skip as I’m not sure as to your personal interests. If you are more interested in culture / museums etc, then you will want to include more of the cities, and less of the countryside. Conversely, if you are less interested in the outdoors, perhaps leaving out some of the countryside attractions would be a good idea 🙂

Generally my advice would be just to stick to flights as it’s likely going to be easier and probably less expensive. The train though can be a good option if you book far enough in advance, it will just take a little bit longer.

Hope this helps – have a great trip!

Leslie says

21st July 2018 at 11:12 pm

Four women from Texas will be traveling to the UK in September and wanted to drive (one of us is brave enough to drive on the wrong side of the road). We spend 8 days in London last September with side trips to Bath and a tour to Oxford and Cotswolds and Warwick Castle. We have relatives in Glasgow, so plan to see that area of Scotland. Your information is a Godsend and thank you so much for all your planning. We will let you know how it goes!

22nd July 2018 at 9:36 pm

Thanks Leslie – please do! We always love to hear feedback as to how our posts help people (or if they need changing, we love to hear about that too!)

Have an awesome trip!

Ruth Deane says

11th July 2018 at 6:24 am

A good travel guide to the UK. I know it is difficult to provided a balanced approach due to limited wordage but the emphasis should be on the UK. N. Ireland and its capital Belfast have been sadly neglected in this article and the focus was Dublin which is not part of the UK. Surely something coulf have been added about Belfast and N. Ireland in general. It is a beautiful place. The author did make a reference to the Dark Hedges but associates them with Dublin. Last time I checked they are quite definitely in N. IRELAND. Hope this criticism is constructive. N. Ireland continues to get a bad press but it is a beautiful place and the majority of the people are that bad either.

11th July 2018 at 9:44 am

Constructive feedback is always welcome! We’re actually visiting Northern Ireland next week for a week to fully explore Belfast and the Coastal Causeway, and will be updating our content (and creating new content!) to have more information on this part of the UK 🙂 Stay tuned!

Craig Grimston says

26th June 2018 at 2:47 am

Thank you!!

September is a perfect month to come to Texas – the weather is perfect then! I’d be happy to answer any questions you have to the best of my ability (I’m not a native Texan – originally from Australia), but there is a lot of great things to do here. Austin and San Antonio are great too.

Thank you for offering to answer any questions! We are going in a group, so I’m sure a lot of questions will come up! I’ll try not to bombard you with them, but I may just hit you with a few! We are planning for somewhere in June to August next year (I plan ahead big time!) and couldn’t be more excited to see your beautiful country!

But please, definitely hit me up with any questions you have about Dallas or Texas. If I can’t answer them, I can track someone down who can!

Thanks!! Craig

22nd June 2018 at 8:02 pm

Hi Laurence and Jessica,

I just wanted to say thank you for posting this itinerary. I really wanted to plan a road trip in the UK and after googling about it all I got was a bunch of blogs pointing out all of the negative things and basically saying “don’t bother”!

As I was about to give up and go the typical tourist route, I came across your website. It was exactly what I was looking for! It is inspirational, and put the joy and adventure back into my travel plans.

I’m pretty much going to stick to your itinerary with the exception of Ireland (I wanted to check out the Lake District and Liverpool), so Ireland may have to be a separate road trip!

I have a million questions, but I’m going to spare you of that! LOL. I really just wanted to say a big thank you for sharing your experience and knowledge!

Kindest Regards, Craig – Dallas Texas

25th June 2018 at 9:28 pm

Thank you so much, it always means a lot to hear that people are finding our content useful. I think you are making a sensible choice – there is a lot to see on the mainland of the UK, and it’s also less hassle to worry about rental cars and ferries if you leave Ireland for another trip 🙂

We’re happy to answer any questions you have. We’re actually planning a trip to Texas for late September, and will be swinging by Dallas, so may have some questions for you in return!

Vanessa says

14th May 2018 at 9:38 pm

I’ve googled “hire car” and it says “rental car.” But on your site here it seems that a rental care and a hire car are different things. What exactly is the difference? Thank you! And also thank you for this post – it’s amazing and I think I will definitely base my trip -whenever that may be… – around it. Bookmarking this page!!

15th May 2018 at 5:57 pm

Thanks Vanessa! I think in the UK we use the term hire car, wheras in the USA it’s more likely to be called a rental car. But yes, they are the same thing in my mind, you can use the terms interchangeably as far as I know 🙂 Have a great trip, and don’t hesitate to let us know if you have any questions at all 😀

Saurabh says

7th May 2018 at 7:55 am

Hi Lawrence, This is a great post! I think I can use some help. We are planning a 2 week trip to UK in August with a 1 year old toddler. What from above or otherwise will be a good itinerary for us. How realistic is it for me to cover what you have listed here? Appreciate any help. Thanks!

7th May 2018 at 10:03 pm

Thanks Saurabh! First, I should say that not having kids ourselves this isn’t an area of expertise for us 🙂 However, based on experiences of friends who travel with family, my suggestion would be to probably cut the itinerary in half, and focus on some of the major cities. As it is, it’s quite a busy itinerary, and I think you will have a better time doing a bit less and having the time to really explore some of the cities on the itinerary. So for example, maybe just do England and Scotland, and skip Ireland and Wales. This will reduce your travel, and let you spend a bit longer in each city. I’d also advise finding accommodation close to the city centres and attractions, so at least one of you can go out sight-seeing if one of you needs to stay behind for naps etc. I hope this helps – have a wonderful trip!

3rd May 2018 at 12:38 am

My husband and I are following this itinerary this summer, flying round trip into Gatwick from Canada. I was looking at the cost of the ferry from Scotland to Ireland and than Ireland to Wales and was shocked at the cost. Do you know of any Ferry discounts?

3rd May 2018 at 7:12 pm

Hi Sarah – you can try the various ferry search companies like directferries or a1ferries I think they are called. Unfortunately that time of year is school holidays, and there aren’t many companies operating the routes, so the prices go up. You might consider instead flying from Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin instead, and hiring a car in Ireland rather than taking the ferry, if that is a cheaper option!

Badariah says

21st March 2018 at 8:24 am

Awesome I am planning for a 2 week get away to UK. Your article helpsss a lot. Planning to go in mid sept till end of sept

21st March 2018 at 11:25 am

Thanks very much – have a wonderful trip!

11th March 2018 at 9:06 am

hi lawrence me n my wife middle aged planning to do england and scotland in 15 days in july which would be ideal places to cover by public transport. i am open to hire a car for 2 to 3 days if required. please suggest us best possible train route for this trip we are flying in n out of london thanks waiting for ur reply

11th March 2018 at 10:02 am

My advice would be to follow my 10 day UK itinerary, which is designed for public transport: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/10-day-uk-itinerary-public-transport-train-bus/

You could spend a little extra time in each location, or you could add a couple of stops. My advice would be to add 1 day in Bath near Bristol, stop in Manchester between Liverpool and York, and think about stopping in Newcastle on the way to Edinburgh. If you wanted to see the Cotswolds, you could do that with a hire car from Bath, or on a tour from London.

I hope this helps! That post also has lots of information on using public transport in the UK. Have a great trip!

Christine says

19th February 2018 at 4:57 am

Hello and Thank You!! I was just wondering, I’m not the best with timelines haha, but exactly how many hotel stays are there in total in each location? I’m just trying to determine if you actually spent the night in each location for both nights or if you spent the day touring then drove to the next location and got a room, especially for the 1 day places… if that makes sense? My husband and are are arriving March 10th and fly back out the 24th so just trying to sort out the timelines… Also it was suggested to me to go to Cornwall or Leeds, what are your thoughts? Thanks!

19th February 2018 at 6:11 pm

Hi! And my pleasure 😀

So you’d be looking at:

2 nights in London 1 night in Oxford 1 night in the Cotswolds 1 night in the Peak District 1 night in Manchester (could do Leeds here instead) 1 night in York 2 nights in Edinburgh (could do one night in Northumberland on the way up) 3 nights in Ireland / Northern Ireland 1 night in Cardiff 1 night in Bristol or Bath

You could of course spend more or less time in each destination, and leave say London after two full days but only one night, and overnight in Oxford. So really it’s up to you 🙂

Leeds you could easily fit into this itinerary. Cornwall would be a bit harder as it’s a bit further away. If you wanted to do Cornwall, you might need to leave Ireland out for example to give yourself enough time. Hope this helps!

15th February 2018 at 10:57 pm

Awesome Itinerary, I would add Canterbury to this list 🙂

17th February 2018 at 8:35 pm

I’ve only briefly visited Canterbury, must return!

22nd January 2018 at 4:52 pm

This came a blessing in disguise after searching for a week almost and making all shit loads of itineraries. I am thinking of blindly following this as it looks great to me. Need your help on a few points here if it doe snot bother you much, it would serve a great deal of planning for me in addition to what it already has, 1. Was this too hectic considering the number of places you covered? 2. Was driving time included in the time spent at each place you mentioned? 3. Is driving safe in and around England? 4. Is driving a cheaper option than using rail/bus transport? 5. How much did this two week trip cost you? 6. How much does the drive part of the trip cost?

22nd January 2018 at 5:44 pm

HI Saurabh!

Pleased to hear you found the itinerary 🙂 I’m happy to answer your questions of course.

1. This is definitely a busy itinerary, although as you can see from the other comments, many people have enjoyed it. So it really depends on your own personal style of travel and your preferences, as well as who you are travelling with. If you want a less hectic schedule, I’d suggest perhaps leaving the Irish part of the trip out, and maybe focusing on England and Scotland, and perhaps extending your time in cities like London and Edinburgh.

2. Yes, driving time is included. Driving time is not too great in the UK as distances are not large and the motorways are good, however, be aware that traffic can be bad around rush hour in the morning and evenings.

3. Yes, driving is very safe. Of course, accidents happen like anywhere in the world, but for the most part you shouldn’t have any trouble.

4. It depends on a few factors – mostly how many of you there are. For one person, it might be more cost-effective to take public transport. Also, if you book public transport well in advance, especially trains, this can be much cheaper than buying tickets on the day. Car hire also depends on the size of the car, but you can get pretty good value car hire. Fuel is quite expensive, but most modern hire cars are very fuel efficient. I am shortly going to publish a post with a similar itinerary that focuses on travelling in the UK by public transport, so stay tuned for that 🙂

5. Cost is really up to you, as it depends so much on what you want to see! I’d say you can hire a car for around £180 – £250 a week, fuel costs will be in the region of £50-£70 a week, and accommodation is likely to be in the range of £80 – £150 a night for two people sharing. You can of course get cheaper and more expensive accommodation options, it really depends on your style of travel.

6. The main costs for the car are the car hire, fuel, and any insurance you buy. I’d say between £200 and £300 a week, plus any parking fees. I’d definitely advise always booking a hotel that includes free parking.

I hope this helps with your planning – have a wonderful trip, and don’t miss my one week itinerary post for more ideas 🙂

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/UK-Itinerary-One-Week-Road-Trip/

Steve and Cheryl Bales says

26th February 2018 at 9:09 pm

Thank you for the wealth of information! We are planning to take a trip to visit our daughter who is in the Air Force in the UK this May. I’ve read your itinerary and the questions and answers that followed. There were a couple of questions that popped up for me and I was hoping you could answer them. You mentioned taking a car over on the ferry to Ireland. We will be driving our daughter’s car, but I was wondering if we needed special insurance on the car to have it ferried. My husband are both disabled to a degree; neither of us are capable of walking long distances or sitting for any duration. Is there a need for concern over these issues? And, what is the cost of a London Pass and how many people does it cover, there will be four in our group? Any information would be much appreciated, thank you in advance. Steve and Cheryl

26th February 2018 at 9:19 pm

Hi Steve and Cheryl,

Thanks for reaching out, and I’m happy to hear you have found the content useful. You don’t normally need special insurance on a car to have it ferried, but you will likely need to check with your daughter’s insurer to make sure it is covered in Ireland. As far as I am aware it should be covered in Northern Ireland with the full coverage, and most UK insurers do provide at least some level cover for the EU, which Ireland is a part of, but worth checking.

For the itinerary I’ve put together, it’s really up to you how much you do. All the major cities have good public transport if you choose not to drive, as well as sight-seeing buses and things like that.

The London Pass prices vary – you have to buy one price per person, so that would be four passes total. Again, the value is up to you and how much you can get out of them. My only concern would be to get real value out of them you do need to try and pack quite a lot in – if you aren’t sure if that’s going to be possible you might end up being better off not getting them and just paying the ticket prices. Also, I’m not sure of your ages, but many attractions have senior concessions, which might also save you money rather than getting a pass. Worth checking the individual websites for the different attractions you want to visit to see what those might be.

You can see the London Pass prices here; https://prf.hn/click/camref:1011lbTW/pubref:FTU2WeekQuestion/destination:https%3A%2F%2Fwww.londonpass.com%2Flondon-pass-prices.php

Derian Quek says

4th September 2017 at 1:10 pm

This trip seems a bit rushed when driving over to Ireland..I am also planning a 2 weeks this December to January. Any tips on this? Am planning London/Manchester/Lake district/Edinburgh/Cotswolds/bath/Stonehenge/Paris

Laurence says

4th September 2017 at 4:05 pm

Hey Darian,

This trip is definitely quite fast – unfortunately folks don’t have too much time sometimes, and are keen to see as much as possible, which is what I try to achieve on this itinerary.

Regarding your itinerary – at that time of year do be aware that the weather obviously won’t be great and it will be getting dark around 4pm – just something to bear in mind. Certainly your plan is possible but will also be quite packed. Perhaps focusing on a few less locations and seeing more. From your list I’d suggest London, with a day trip to bath, the Cotswolds and Stonehenge, then Edinburgh and Paris. You could add in Manchester as well of course. It would also depend on if you have visited any of the locations before and how you plan to travel. I’d suggest train from London to Edinburgh, and a cheap flight from Edinburgh to Paris.

4th September 2017 at 4:15 pm

Hi Laurence. It would actually be my first time to the UK. I’m visiting Manchester because I would wanna catch a game at old Trafford and that’s probably the only reason why. Flight from Edinburgh to Paris sounds like a good option though I would most likely be self driving from London up north. I’m thinking 3 days in London, 1 day in manchester, 2 days in lake district, 3 days in Edinburgh, 1 day to cotswolds and then 3 days in Paris via eurostar before heading back to London for my return flight

Mital Khona says

9th August 2017 at 2:43 pm

Hi Lawrence, Thanks a bunch for this wonderful itinerary… 1. We are travelling this September with 2 Kids ( 2 years old and 8 years old) and2 parents ( senior citizens).. Is this still doable.. I was thinking of picking up train for journey from London to Edinburgh 2. We would like to spend 3 days on the alternative route to Ireland suggested by you above. Can you help on the route/ time we should allot to Snowdonia, etc(west coast of the UK, including Glasgow, the Lake District, and Liverpool, as well as popping into Wales for the stunning Snowdonia national park)

7th January 2018 at 1:26 pm

Hi Mital! It really depends on your kids and grandparents and their stamina. I think this trip might be a bit much for some, and you might find it easier to go a bit slower and take things in a bit more. So perhaps a trip focusing on Edinburgh / London, with a hire car for the return journey down the west coast of the UK. I’d say three – four days in London, two to three days in Edinburgh, and then the rest of the time on the drive down the west coast would work!

Sussex Bloggers says

30th May 2017 at 12:56 pm

Can’t believe you’ve completely skipped Cornwall and the rest of the south coast. Such beautiful scenery all along the southern coastline and some wonderful towns and villages. Here’s a little teaser!

ipsita bhattacharya says

3rd May 2017 at 12:19 am

Hi guys, We are planning a trip to the UK in August/September 2017 and this 2-week itinerary is proving to be of great help! But if we plan to take public transport instead of driving, how much of this is doable? We are also looking at two weeks and while I understand taking trains/buses will eat into our travelling time, we are not sure we want to drive. Please advise. And thanks for this wonderful travel plan!

8th August 2017 at 8:56 am

Our pleasure. Much of this is doable, certainly between the major cities by train at least. We’d advice flying from the UK, likely Edinburgh to Dublin, and then back from Dublin to Cardiff or London. It’s definitely achievable in part though 🙂

Jessica says

2nd April 2017 at 1:15 am

I am so glad that I found your itinerary as we will be visiting the UK for a little over two weeks this coming summer. I do have question for a part of the trip when you have to ferry from Scotland to Ireland, is it easy to find ferries that will take your car across? Also do you recommend a car for the entire trip or to break it up with trains? Such as from London to Edinburgh? Thank you and I hope to hear back from you soon.

7th January 2018 at 1:24 pm

Hi Jessica! Sorry for the slow response. Most of the ferries take cars, but the question is as to whether or not your rental car company will let you take the car on the ferry. So you would need to check with them. If not, you might find it easier to say fly from Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin to continue to journey, and perhaps pick up a hire car in Ireland instead.

Nishant says

19th March 2017 at 10:59 am

My family of 4 is planning in Aug’17 for 2 week and i like your write up here. we would be staying with our friend’s family (4 member) in LONDON and then accompany them to this tour plan. we wish to know approx budget in INR apart from AIR Ticket required for this kind of tour. Consider AIR BnB stay, Home cooking where ever possible, car drive and budgeted expense suitable for family.

แอโรคอม บริษัทจำกัด says

13th March 2017 at 8:24 am

Your 2 weeks itinerary seems very good. I am concerned with parking space in tourist attractions especially in big cities. Is it not so difficult to find parking area in all these recommended places (except London)? How much is a typical parking fee?

Thanks in advance! Pairoj S.

13th March 2017 at 2:24 pm

Thanks very much! Parking fees really vary depending on where you want to park. On road meter parking is usually the most expensive, around £3 an hour. I’d suggest finding a larger car park, like a multistorey operated by a company like NCP. These are more reasonable, and you would pay on a sliding scale where it is better value for staying for longer. I wouldn’t worry though, there is usually plenty of parking available, and sometimes if you don’t mind walking a little bit, if you don’t park centrally you can park for free. Have a great trip!

Mittal Shah says

10th March 2017 at 11:44 am

Hi Lawrence and Norah. I have been trying to plan a road trip in UK around July end for approximately 12days and have found a lot of helpful information.There are certain things i would like to know from you: For road trip should i consider hiring a caravan or a car( 4 of us travelling)? Is it better to book a hotel or bnb? Please help. Awaiting your reply

12th March 2017 at 9:47 pm

Thanks for your comment. A car would definitely be the best option, for four of you it would likely be the most cost effective option. I’d also suggest bed and breakfasts are a nice option, although there are lots of great hotels as well, it really depends on your budget,

Enjoy your trip!

rajul parikh says

19th February 2017 at 11:46 am

Hi Lawrence and Norah just been browsing through your site and taking in the information about the 2 week holiday in the UK. We find your information relevant and useful. We live in India and are considering a trip sometime mid June 2017. This would be our first trip to the UK. Lots of questions: would the weather be ok around that time? To cover your suggested itinerary (including ireland) how much driving would one end up doing everyday? Would your stops which are marked alphabetically on the map suggest overnight stay? Since we would like to spend at least 5 days in London we would need to extend our trip to about 21 days. Look forward to hearing from you.

19th February 2017 at 11:49 am

Happy that you found it useful! Yes, the main stopping points suggest an overnight stay. The weather is likely to be good in June, however, the weather in the UK can be very unpredictable. Coming from India, you’ll probably find it fairly cool 😉 I’d say between 15 and 25C would be the norm, and you should plan for rain whenever you visit the UK.

In terms of driving, the UK is quite small so not too much, probably not more than 2 – 3 hours a day.

Myn Wong says

14th February 2017 at 1:18 am

Hi. May I know the estimated cost of this trip?

George Monaghan says

30th January 2017 at 8:51 pm

Finding this site most interesting !

30th January 2017 at 8:52 pm

Thanks George, appreciated!

Dave_Toni says

18th January 2017 at 2:17 am

Hi guys, I’m staying in London for a short time (4 days) and I’m now thinking I should have booked a longer stay, but I’m on route to another destination. What would you recommend for a four day tour to get the best out of “must see” locations in in short amount of time? Really enjoying the site, keep up the great information. Thanks Dave.

18th January 2017 at 6:52 pm

Four days is a good time to see lots of London 🙂 My advice, if you’ve not been before, would be to focus on the highlights, plus allocate some time just to wander a bit. I have a two day Itinerary here: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2016/06/two-day-london-itinerary-essential-sight-seeing.html That should help a bit, and then an itinerary that focuses on the region of Kensington: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2015/07/top-8-things-to-do-in-kensington.html I also have a guide for getting around London: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2016/08/guide-public-transport-london.html Some tips for the best photo spots in London: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2015/12/best-photography-locations-london.html And finally, we always recommend the London Pass to save money if you’re planning on visiting a lot of attractions. Here’s a great breakdown to find out if that’s worth it for you or not: independenttravelcats.com/2016/05/21/tips-using-buying-london-pass-worth/ Enjoy!

13th January 2017 at 10:19 am

So so perfect! Planning a 2 week UK holiday in June. This was God-sent!

13th January 2017 at 10:21 am

Wonderful, pleased you found it useful

Ashton says

5th November 2016 at 5:24 am

This is perfect! Exactly what I was looking for to start planning my honeymoon!! Thank you for taking the time to put this together

13th November 2016 at 7:58 pm

My pleasure – let us know how it goes and if there’s anything missing we can add to the post!

shiva bhavini says

16th July 2016 at 2:34 pm

Hi Laurence & Jessica, My husband and I are planning to have a 10 days UK trip , reaching London on September 16 and have return flight from london on september 26 , can you please suggest should we take some travel agent to take us around in UK ? Thanks much in advance

Ellana McNulty says

3rd July 2016 at 1:39 am

Hi Laurence & Jessica, My husband and I are planning on following your itinerary when we go over in August. When we first looked at your blog, there was a map at the end that you could zoom in on, but cannot find it now? Is the link still available.

3rd July 2016 at 11:24 am

Hi Ellana! Sorry about that, the map was causing issues for mobile users so I removed it. See comment below with a better answer!

Paul McNulty says

7th July 2016 at 12:09 am

Thanks for this Laurence!

Is it possible to have the whole route on the map like you had it before?

4th November 2016 at 11:13 pm

Hi Paul, I’ve been battling with google maps over this and gave up as it wouldn’t let me have enough waypoints. So I’ve switched to Bing Maps with the embedded image, and there’s a link to the route here: https://binged.it/2fDQGD2

Sorry for the delay!

5th November 2016 at 12:02 am

Thanks Laurence… we toured the UK in the last half of August using your itinerary. We modified it a bit to suit our personal tastes, but the basis of our trip was thanks to you. And it was even better than we expected!! Cheers.

5th November 2016 at 9:49 am

Brilliant! Delighted you had a good trip 😀

Alicia says

7th June 2017 at 3:22 am

The above link does not have a driving route in it. Is it no longer working (or I am doing it wrong)?

Unfortunately Google wouldn’t let me put together a driving route with this many stops, so this was the best I could do!

Seyne Tee says

27th June 2016 at 4:03 am

Hi Laurence & Jessica, I plan to visit UK for 2 weeks and rent a car to travel around places outside UK. Your perfect itinerary is exactly what I’m looking for, thanks! I have a problem here, I can only travel with my husband and son in the middle of November, will the weather be friendly enough to carry out activities as per your recommendation?

27th June 2016 at 9:23 am

Well, the weather in the UK can be quite varied, with sun even in November! However it will more likely be cold and grey, temperatures in the range of 3 – 10 degrees C. It will also be dark fairly early. However, that shouldn’t put you off, a lot of this itinerary is focused on the cities, and indoors activities, so you should be fine, although you might want to edit the itinerary a bit to focus more on indoor activities than outdoor ones 🙂

Stephen Mason says

9th May 2016 at 3:58 am

This trip is incredible! Can you give a price of what the final trip costed?

28th June 2016 at 11:55 am

Hi Stephen – it really depends on many factors, including your budget for accommodation / food. You can find places for £50 / night in most of the locations I’ve mentioned, food per person you could get away with £15 a day, then there’s fuel and car hire, not to mention attraction entry. I’d probably look to budgeting around £700 – £1500 per person, as a guideline, but a lot of variables to take into account 🙂

SharronJ says

8th March 2016 at 6:33 pm

This is just what I was looking for. I am planning on visiting your wonderful country for a month next year and just started doing research. Your article is just what I was looking for Thanks so much!

8th March 2016 at 6:35 pm

My pleasure! Have a wonderful trip 🙂

Edward says

17th January 2016 at 11:32 pm

Thank you for this. I will be going in UK late Spetember to October (one month) and this is a nice itnerary and I can do it in a slower pace. Would you say September and October is a good time to do this? How is the weather usually in those months?

2nd February 2016 at 2:47 am

It’s the Autum time so you might fair pretty well, considering. It starts to cool down in September and the trees start changing. There will be rain, especially in the West of England and Wales but there always is.

The best time to visit England is May – August, but if you don’t mind getting caught in the rain now and then, you shouldn’t have a problem

Joanne says

12th October 2015 at 2:18 pm

Is it possible to do this itinerary relying only on public transportation since I don’t drive? Thank you in advance.

12th October 2015 at 2:21 pm

Good parts of it are certainly possible, as the major cities are linked by public transport, and the trains in particular are an excellent and fast way to get around. One tip – book well in advance on specific trains to get the best prices in the UK, the fares you pay on the day are much higher. I’d also suggest flying from Edinburgh to Dublin if you wanted to include the Irish part of the trip.

You might have a bit more difficulty visiting places like the Cotswolds or other “country” parts on your own, however there are plenty of tour operators who can give you a day trip out from London to say the Cotswolds and Stonehenge.

On the whole though, yes, the majority of this itinerary would be more than do-able by public transport!

Nina Tchernova says

7th October 2015 at 2:43 pm

Hi Laurence, thank you so much for sharing this! We are planning to go in April, and this is exactly what we were hoping to do. And here it all is, so wonderfully explored and illustrated! One question though – what would you recommend about car rentals -one, or three? when we cross on a ferry to Ireland, do we bring the car, or is it better to rent another one there, and then another when we get back?

10th October 2015 at 1:14 pm

My pleasure 🙂 The answer to your question isn’t as simple as it sounds. One way rentals, as you’d need if you were to change cars, are generally more expensive than returning the car to the same place. On the other hand, a ferry ticket without a car is cheaper! So you might want to just check the math and see, depending on your budget. Personally, I’d not bother with the hassle of changing cars and just stick with the same one, you just need to check that it’s ok to drive the car in Ireland as well 🙂

10th October 2015 at 1:28 pm

Thank you very much, we will have to make a few enquiries.

Darryl Chan says

24th August 2015 at 6:03 pm

Hey! Love your itinerary! Is there anyway I can contact you to get more personalised advices from you? Looking forward to your reply!

27th August 2015 at 5:28 pm

Sure, you can just drop me an e-mail via the contact page on the site, or just fire away in the comments and I’ll see what I can do,

17th August 2015 at 4:58 am

Where’s the castle in your first picture?

25th September 2015 at 8:51 pm

The castle in the first picture (with the daffodils) is Alnwick castle in Northumberland. Home to Harry Potter or at least the was some filming taken place there and also some of Downtown Abbey. Alnwick is also home to Barter Books where the original ‘keep calm and carry on’ poster was discovered. Northumberland has one of the largest number of castles in the uk. Some of the most impressive I think are Bamburgh Castle, Lindisfarne Castle (on holy island – which needs a visit itself) and Chillingham Castle (known for being pretty spooky). Contact Wooler Tourist Infomation Office on +44 1668 282123 to learn about accommodation as Wooler is a fantastic base for the best of Northumberland.

25th September 2015 at 9:02 pm

Can I also say there is an awesome place for Brits and tourists alike; Beamish, the living museum. It is an outdoor village fashioned perfectly on olden days northern England complete with coal mine, dentis, working sweet shop and more

Monica says

11th August 2015 at 8:16 pm

I loved you itinerary and pictures. I’m definitely using your steps to trace some of my own. Thanks for sharing. I’m excited to read through more of your posts.

15th August 2015 at 8:32 pm

Thanks Monica, have a great trip!

3rd August 2015 at 9:50 pm

Great review of a nice trip through GB. My wife and I are trying to plan one for May, and we were thinking of spending more time in Scottland. Do you have any suggestions for moving from Endinburgh and into the northern part of Scotland and skipping Ireland. I thinking about Aberdeen and stopping by Ben Nevis, but it’s our first time traveling abroad and I’d love more information. Thanks!

3rd August 2015 at 11:49 pm

Hi Andy! To be honest I’ve not spent a lot of time in Scotland recently, but I can very much recommend taking the time to visit Glencoe. It’s a couple of hours from Edinburgh, and is an absolutely stunning valley in the highlands. I’ve also heard nothing but good things about the isle of Skye! Sorry I can’t be of much more help right now 🙁

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Let me know when there's a reply to my comment (just replies to your comment, no other e-mails, we promise!)

Subscribe to our monthly Newsletter where we share our latest travel news and tips. This also makes you eligible to enter our monthly giveaways!

We only ask for your e-mail so we can verify you are human and if requested notify you of a reply. To do this, we store your data as outlined in our privacy policy . Your e-mail will not be published or used for any other reason other than those outlined above.

The Ultimate 10-Day England Itinerary: 3 Perfect Routes

Last Updated on January 3, 2024

by Maggie Turansky

Disclaimer: This article contains affiliate links. That means if you click a link and make a purchase, we may make a small commission. As an Amazon Associate we earn from qualifying purchases. For more information, see our privacy policy.

Planning the perfect England itinerary can get a bit overwhelming, especially when you’re looking at exploring the country outside of the capital. There is so much to see and do in England that you can be forgiven if you feel slightly dazed when trying to figure out how to pack everything into a short period of time. However, if you’re planning to spend 10 days in England, there are tons of options available for you that can take you all over the country.

Far too many visitors to England set their sites only on London and fail to realise all that lies elsewhere in the country, from beautiful beaches to historic towns to stunning natural vistas — England has it all.

So if you’re interested in mapping out the perfect 10-day itinerary you’ve come to the right place. We’ve lived in and travelled around England extensively and have a lot of knowledge about where to go and how long to spend in each amazing destination in this beautiful country.

Table of Contents

Getting To & Around England

The road and rail systems in England are well-developed, but it can still take some planning to figure out how you want to get around.

First and foremost, you need to figure out which airport or city you will be flying into. If you’re planning on including London on your trip to England (or even if you’re not), then it’s probably easiest to fly into the capital, however, it is worth noting that there are a total of six international airports that serve the greater London area – these include Heathrow, Gatwick, Luton, Stansted, London City and Southend.

If you are coming from any further than continental Europe, then it is likely you will only fly into Heathrow or Gatwick, located to the southeast and south of Central London respectively. Getting to central London from any of the area’s main airports is straightforward and easy, as there are many different options available.

Once you’ve figured out your plan to get to England, you need to find out how you plan to get around. As I mentioned earlier, the public transit system in the vast majority of England is incredibly well-developed and easy to navigate.

As a general rule, if you’re planning on spending a good amount of time in cities, you can plan to rely solely on the public transport system and your own two feet to get around. This holds especially true for London, but can apply to most major metropolitan areas in England.

When you venture outside of the capital or other cities to enjoy the countryside and rolling hills of England, is when you may want to consider renting a car. While you don’t really need a car in the cities, having your own vehicle when exploring national parks or smaller villages is generally preferable as it can give you an infinite more amount of flexibility and control over your itinerary.

Driving in England is safe and easy, as the roads are in fantastic condition and people are generally very courteous drivers.

Keep in mind for those coming from abroad that they do drive on the left-hand side of the road in England and while this may seem daunting for those who are not used to it, it takes surprisingly little time to get the hang of it — especially if there is other traffic on the road!

If you’re planning on hiring a car while in England, we recommend booking through Rentalcars.com. This platform aggregates prices across many major car hire companies, ensuring that you get a great deal for your rental car.

It’s also worth considering taking out an excess insurance policy through a third party like iCarHireInsurance which will typically be cheaper compared to taking out the equivalent insurance through the car rental company.

If you don’t want to rent a car for your England road trip itinerary or just plan to get one for a couple of days but not for the entirety of your trip, then you’ll likely be wondering what the best way to get between cities is in England.

The rail network is going to be the most comfortable and efficient way to travel between English destinations and the system is extensive and incredibly easy to use. However, trains can be quite expensive in England if not booked far enough in advance. To avoid overpaying on a train ticket, we suggest using Omio to book your journeys well in advance.

If you want to save some money during your trip to England, then the bus is your best bet. Coaches in England are frequent and extensive and can cost a fraction of the same route on the train, however, they are not as comfortable and can be a fair bit slower depending on the route. Again, you can book coach routes online here.

London and Southwest Itinerary

This first itinerary for England has you exploring London and some of the most vibrant regions and cities to the west and along the coast. Though this itinerary can be done by public transport, it would be best done if you rented a car on the fourth day when leaving London.

Days 1-3: London

The best place to begin any trip to England is in its historic and vibrant capital city, London. As one of the largest cities in Europe, London is packed in the brim with cool and interesting things to see and do and there is no way that you will be able to pack it all into a mere three days , so it’s best not even to try.

Instead, concentrate your first day on the sites of central London, including Trafalgar Square, the National Gallery, Green Park, the Palaces of Westminster, Big Ben and Westminster Abbey. Take a walking tour if you want to get your bearings and get some historical context for all the sites you’re seeing.

On your second day, visit the Tower of London, gaze in awe at the Tower Bridge, walk across the ultra-modern Millennium Bridge to the Tate Modern and visit St Paul’s Cathedral and Borough Market.

And on your third day in London, visit the incredible British Museum (the Egyptian exhibit is particularly fascinating if you ask me!), before browsing the shops on Oxford Street and in Covent Garden before wandering through the eclectic and trendy SoHo neighbourhood.

For visitors who plan to visit a lot of paid attractions, buying a London Go City Pass will save you money on entrance fees.

If you’re not interested in seeing more of the city, you could opt for a day trip to countless places including Windsor Castle, Oxford, Cambridge , Bath, the Seven Sisters or even to York. You can visit these places independently via coach or train or take a day tour if you’d prefer a guide.

Though three days in London won’t really allow you to venture past the city centre and to see anything much past the main tourist sites, it can still give you an excellent feel for the city (plus plenty of this to visit when you inevitably return!)

Where to Stay in London

Hotel Edward – A great mid-range option in Paddington, west London, this is a great place to stay if you want to be situated close to central London. They have countless great rooms available.

Sanderson Hotel – A hip luxury option in SoHo, this hotel is located only a quick dash away from Oxford Street. They have countless plush rooms on offer and a number of other amenities including a restaurant/bar, gym, spa and many others.

Astor Hyde Park Hostel – This hip hostel is perfect for budget and solo travellers in London. Located centrally close to Hyde Park, it is well situated to explore a lot of London’s top attractions, has fantastic common areas, and offers both dorm and private rooms.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more London hotels!

Days 4-5: Bristol

From London, it’s time to head west to the trendy city of Bristol. This city is often overlooked by tourists and it really is a shame — it really has so much to offer. Though you can easily visit Bristol as a day trip from London, it is worth spending a night here, especially because you can spend your first day exploring all of the amazing sites on the way to the city.

On your way to Bristol, make sure to make a number of stop-offs and detours in order to really pack a lot of the highlights of West England into a short period of time.

A short detour from the motorway to Bristol will lead you to the iconic neolithic site of Stonehenge and a bit further afield, you can visit Salisbury with its famous cathedral.

And just a bit before you hit Bristol proper, make sure to spend a good amount of time exploring the beautiful city of Bath . This historic spa town has been an important settlement since Roman times and there are lots of cool things to see and do here.

Once in Bristol, there are lots of things to see and do in order to really get to know the city, but you can pack in into one day easily, you can take a guided tour or go about independently.

Learn about Bristol’s history at the fantastic M Shed museum or learn more about its maritime history at Brunel’s SS Great Britain museum.

If you’re interested in street art, you will be delighted to hear that the famous artist Banksy got his start in Bristol and it has a thriving arts scene. Bristol also has a wonderful food and craft beer scene and it can be enjoyed while exploring the revitalised area of Wapping Wharf.

Where to Stay in Bristol

Victoria Square Hotel Clifton Village – A plush boutique hotel located in Bristol’s lush Clifton suburb, this is a great place to stay if you’re looking for a mid-range option in the city. They have a range of rooms available and a hearty breakfast included in the nightly price.

The Bristol Hotel – The ideal luxury hotel in Bristol, this place is located within easy walking distance of the city’s top attractions and they have a number of clean comfortable and chic rooms on offer.

The Full Moon Backpackers – An ideal option for those solo and budget travellers amongst us, this hostel is a great choice in Bristol. They have a number of dorms and private rooms available, fantastic common areas and a fantastic laid-back vibe, perfect for exploring Bristol!

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Bristol hotels!

Days 6-8: Cornwall

On your sixth day of this itinerary, it’s time to drive even further southwest to one of the most beautiful and sunny places in England – Cornwall!

The southwestermost region of the country, Cornwall has long been a favourite holiday destination for locals but foreign tourists rarely venture this way, and it’s incredibly hard to see why — there is so much see and do!

Cornwall is most famous for its beaches, but there is a lot more to it as well. If you’re a nature lover, there are countless walks to go on. If you want to try your hand at surfing, make sure to hit the waves in Newquay, the capital of the sport in England! History buffs will delight in the castles and ruins that dot the region as well.

One of the most famous castles is St Michael’s Mount, just outside of Penzance, which is situated on its own island accessible by a causeway that appears as low tide. If you’re a fan of Arthurian legend, then make sure to visit the dramatic ruins of Tintagel, rumoured to be the birthplace of this legendary British ruler.

Spending two or three days in Cornwall is enough to really see a lot of the region and get a good feel four it, but there is always more to see if you spend more time!

Where to Stay in Cornwall

Palma Guest House – Situated in the heart of St Ives, this is an excellent place to base yourself in Cornwall. They have a number of comfortable rooms available and are located within easy walking distance of all this artsy town has to offer!

Selkies NQY   – Located in Newquay just a few hundred metres from the beach, this is a fantastic luxury option for those visiting Cornwall. Great for a romantic couples getaway, they have a number of luxe rooms available.

Lifeboat Inn – Situated on the bay in the lovely artist’s town of St Ives, this is a great place to stay for couples or families alike. They have a number of spacious rooms available and an option to include breakfast in the room rate.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse other places to stay in Cornwall!

Days 9-10: Brighton

And finally on this 10-day southwestern England route, round out your time in the lovely coastal city of Brighton ! Located due south of London, Brighton is about a five-hour drive from Cornwall, but we recommend taking an entire day on the journey as there are so many incredible stops along the way .

Take the time to enjoy such places like Dartmoor National Park in Devon, the Jurassic Coast in Dorset, the beautiful seaside city of Bournemouth, the historic port city of Portsmouth or even the lovely New Forest in Hampshire before arriving in Brighton.

Once in Brighton, take the time to explore the city centre and the lovely, albeit rocky, beach. Of course, no trip to Brighton would be complete without enjoying yourselves at the iconic Brighton Pier.

If you want to get a bit more active and are not interested in exploring the city much, then the iconic walk along the Seven Sisters cliffs is easily accessible from Brighton. This is one of the most beautiful day hikes in the UK and will take you along the stunning rim of the famous white cliffs of this region of England.

Conveniently, Brighton is located only about a thirty- to forty-minute train ride from Gatwick Airport and other London area airports are easy to access from the city as well, so it makes for a perfect place to end your trip to England.

Where to Stay in Brighton

Artist Residence, Brighton – This quaint boutique hotel is perfect for those looking for something a bit more hip and trendy while staying in Brighton. They have a number of great rooms available, a great location and fantastic amenities including great common areas and a tapas restaurant on site.

Seadragon Backpackers – A great backpackers hostel perfect for budget travellers, they are well-located and have both dorm and private rooms available. They have great common areas and a central location perfect for exploring the best of what Brighton has to offer.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Brighton hotels!

London and North England Itinerary

If you’re interested in visiting London and then heading up north during your ten days in England, then this is the perfect itinerary for you. Exploring the historic cities and natural areas of the North, you’re sure to enjoy this route through England.

Again, this is another itinerary where it may prove helpful to have a car for some of it, especially for the bit through the Lake District National Park . If you want to save some money, consider renting a car for a few days from York before continuing on an England by train itinerary.

Spend your first three days of this route in the capital of London, following the same daily activities as mentioned in the Southwest England route above.

Days 4-5: York

From London, hop on a train or hire a car and drive north to the lovely walled city of York. If you do happen to drive (and it is recommended!), then make sure to spend the day stopping off at all of the incredible sites along the way and enjoying the gorgeous English countryside.

Some of these include the lovely university city of Cambridge , the historic city of Worcester, Warwick Castle, Robin Hood’s home of Nottingham or even the incredible Peak District National Park in Derbyshire in central England. You could, perhaps, even make a stop in Oxford or at the incredible Blenheim Palace. Or you could detour to Stratford-upon-Avon – the hometown of Shakespeare!

On the next day, plan to spend it exploring the city. You can see a lot of York in one day and some of the highlights include walking along the city walls, exploring the incredible York Minster, taking in the ruins of St Mary’s Abbey in the Museum Gardens, wandering along The Shambles and learning about the city’s history at the York Castle Museum.

If you’d rather get out into nature, then explore more of rural Yorkshire with a trip to the North York Moors National Park or the Yorkshire Dales National Park — these parks are perfect for nature lovers and Bronte fans alike!

Where to Stay in York

The Queens Hotel – A great boutique option, this place is centrally located, has a number of comfortable rooms on offer and a great and hearty full breakfast is available at an additional cost.

The Grand, York – This is the place to stay in York if you want to be in the lap of luxury during your time in the northern city. They have many plush rooms to choose from, countless luxurious amenities, and a great location for easy sightseeing.

Astor York – An excellent, highly-rated hostel in York, this place is perfect for budget backpackers and solo travellers. They have a range of both private rooms and dorm beds available and are located within ten minutes of York’s historic centre.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more York hotels!

Days 6-7: Lake District

If you didn’t get out and enjoy the natural splendours of Yorkshire, it’s time to do so now in one of England’s most famous national parks — the Lake District. Located in Cumbria, this beautiful area is filled with incredible lakes, mountains and charming villages.

You can spend your time here going on countless walks — there are walks for all skill and fitness levels. There are also countless charming and historic villages to explore, classic pubs to warm up in, and just some absolutely beautiful scenery to enjoy.

Even if you’re not much of an outdoor lover, there s something for everyone in the Lake District and it is well worth taking the time to head out here before heading down to your final destination on this 10-day route through England.

Where to Stay in the Lake District

The Cavendish Arms – A cosy, mid-range option in the Lake District is this historic pub, located in the lovely village of Cartmel. They have a number of clean and comfortable rooms available and a great breakfast available to enjoy each morning.

Embleton Spa Hotel – If you are after a luxury stay in the Lake District, then this is the perfect choice for you. Located in an 18th-century farmhouse in the beautiful countryside, they have a number of plush rooms available, private apartments, and countless amenities to make your stay a great one.

Kendal Hostel – A great option if you’re travelling on a tight budget or solo, this hostel is one of the best-rated in the Lake District. Situated in a historic Georgian townhouse in the town of Kendal, they have a range of dorm and private rooms available and good self-catering facilities.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Lake District hotels!

Days 8-10: Liverpool

And finally on the North England route, end your trip in the historic, vibrant and wonderful city of Liverpool .

Perhaps most famous for being the birthplace of a little-known band called The Beatles, there are plenty of Fab Four-centric sites to see in this city, however, there is so much more in this historic city.

Liverpool has seen a bit of a resurgence in recent years, especially around the newly refurbished Royal Albert Dock which is packed full of trendy restaurants and shops.

You can also learn about Liverpool’s seafaring history as a port city at the Merseyside Maritime Museum. Also worth a visit is the harrowing International Slavery Museum.

Football fans will rejoice in the chance to tour Anfield Stadium , the home to Liverpool FC and Fab Four fans are sure to enjoy the Beatles Story or even a Beatles Tour.

You can even take the time to take a day trip to the nearby city of Manchester if you want to see more Northern English cities.

Where to Stay in Liverpool

The Dolby Hotel – A good option for mid-range travellers. this hotel has a great location overlooking the River Mersey. Located within easy walking distance of the top sites of the city, they have a number of rooms to choose from and breakfast included in the price.

Titanic Hotel Liverpool – If you want a luxurious stay in Liverpool, then look no further than this swanky hotel. Situated a stone’s throw from the top attractions in the city, they have countless amenities and wonderful, comfortable rooms available.

YHA Liverpool Albert Dock – A fantastic backpacker’s hostel, this is the perfect choice for solo and budget travellers. It is located in the centre of the city close to the top attractions and sites, they have both dorm beds and private rooms available and great common areas.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse other hotels in Liverpool .

Northern England Itinerary

If you’ve been to London already and would rather spend your ten days in England somewhere outside of the capital, then this is a great route for you. Still beginning and ending in London, this route is great for those who are planning a trip to the other parts of England and don’t want to concentrate on the capital city.

Day 1: London

Begin your itinerary in London and take a day to explore an area of the city that you haven’t had the chance to yet — there is always something to see and do in London. Take in the street art in Shoreditch, stuff your face at Broadway Market if it’s a Saturday or get lost in the expansive Kew Gardens or Richmond Park .

There are far too many things to do in London that it’s worth spending at least a day in the city even if you’ve visited before.

Days 2-3: York

From London, it’s time to head to York. Follow the suggestions in the itinerary above for the ideas for how to spend your time in York.

Days 4-5: Lake District National Park

From York, head out into the great wide open and enjoy the lovely scenery and villages of the Lake District National Park for two full days.

Days 6-8: Liverpool

And from the Lake District, head to historic Liverpool and enjoy all of the fun things there are to see and do in this historic city.

Days 9-10: Cotswolds

On your final two days, it’s time to head back down south to explore an incredibly charming area of England within easy reach of London – the Cotswolds .

This region, located to the northwest of London, is famed for its quintessentially English towns with thatch-roofed homes and historic pubs. It is the perfect place to end your England itinerary.

Take the time to explore quaint villages like Bourton-on-the-Water, Painswick, Burford, Chipping Campden and countless others. These are some of the most beautiful towns in all of England and are sure to transport you back in time.

If you want to get out into nature, then make sure to check out the Cotswolds AONB (area of outstanding natural beauty) which is full of walking trails and lovely, bucolic vistas.

If you’re looking for a quaint and quiet place to round out this epic route through England, you seriously cannot go wrong with spending some time in the Cotswolds before flying home from London.

Where to Stay in the Cotswolds

The Lamb Inn – This charming pub located in the village of Bourton-on-the-Water is the perfect place to rest your head in the Cotswolds. Oozing with charm, they have a range of comfortable and clean rooms available and a great pub downstairs to grab a pint a great bite to eat.

The Fleece – Located in the village of Witney not too far from Oxford, this is a great boutique hotel to stay at in the Cotswolds. T hey have a range of cosy and comfortable rooms available and a fantastic breakfast cooked each morning.

The Old Stocks Inn – Situated in the charming village of Stow-on-the-Wold, this lovely inn is the perfect place to stay if you’re on the hunt for a luxury stay in the Cotswolds. They have a number of beautiful rooms to choose from and lots of other amenities to make your stay fantastic.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Cotswolds hotels!

There are so many options of places to visit and things to see during your 10 days in England but, hopefully, these three great routes are able to help you plan the trip of your dreams! From historic cities, gorgeous natural scenery, inviting pubs and a wonderful coastline, England has so much to offer visitors — so make sure to see more than just London!

Are you planning a trip to England? Have you visited before? Let us know in the comments!

Related Posts:

The Perfect Cambridge Day Trip from London Itinerary

9 Best Towns to Stay in the Cotswolds

Bath Day Trip from London: A One-Day Itinerary

About Maggie Turansky

Maggie is a co-founder and writer for The World Was Here First. Originally from the US, she has lived in five different countries and has travelled to dozens more, both solo and with her partner, Michael. She particularly loves exploring Spain and spending time in the Caucasus and the Baltics. Read more about Maggie

Hi I am planning to ciné to the uk Dec/Jan 20 days

My plan so far is London 4 days 29/12-2/1. Then Bath as a base to tour the south. Can you recommend how many days in the south based at Bath then where in the North or ? I was planning on hiring a car in Bath or London.

Also open to any addition suggestions like quick visit to Ireland or Scotland if you feel it is with timeframe.

Thank you A

Hello Maggie, enjoyed your article on visiting England. Our family is planning to visit England from July 9 through July 20. We are from Boston, MA. Wanted your recommendation as we would also like to visit Scotland. How should I plan my iteneray.

Thank you, Khuzema Safri (Khuz).

Thanks for your comment! If you want to visit Scotland, you may find this article helpful in planning your trip: https://www.theworldwasherefirst.com/london-scotland-ireland-itinerary/

Leave a Comment Cancel reply

Select language

What are you looking for, see things differently, welcome to britain.

Discover inventive new experiences and captivating stories in 2024, brought together with a dose of British flair. From exploring film settings and pioneering cultural spaces to countryside trails and relaxing wellness retreats, it’s all happening on our shores and you’re invited!

Join immersive exhibitions as the National Gallery celebrates a landmark anniversary or get a taste for chocolate as Birmingham’s Cadbury World also marks its 200th birthday. Venture off the beaten track for new coastal adventures, exploring new trails and walking routes, or take in sporting action as the world’s best compete in everything from athletics to the Premier League.

Whether it’s getting a feel for our vibrant cultural cities, embarking on a coastal adventure, or discovering locations made famous by film and TV, it’s time to experience Britain differently.

VisitBritain/Helena Bradbury

Explore different

VisitBritain/Kieran Duncan

Glen Coe, Scotland

Spilling the tea on GB

We’re spilling the tea on the hottest experiences – and it’s not just a good old brew that we’re mad about.

Cardiff, Wales

Key sporting moments in 2024

Grab your tickets, or a spot by a screen, and join the atmosphere of brilliant British sport.

VisitBritain/Simon Anderson/Royal Pavilion//Nutkhut and Dr Blighty

Day trips from London

Britain packs a punch when it comes to the eclectic range of destinations within close proximity to London.

VisitBritain/Daniel Struthers

Parc national de Sowdonia (Eryri), Pays de Galles

How to see Britain differently

From gastronomic adventures to eco-friendly stays, there’s always more to explore on Britain’s shores.

VisitBritain - The official tourism website of Great Britain

Providing you with inspirational activities and experiences, from those in the know.

Your guidance and information about travelling to Great Britain and Northern Ireland.

Helping the travel industry showcase the best of Britain.

Cultural hotspots

An unmissable destination for travellers, London is a melting pot of history, culture and green spaces.

VisitBritain/Hazel Parreno

From palaces to cobbled alleys, and a dormant volcano, this city is a real show-stopper.

VisitBritain/Andrew Pickett

World-class football and a music scene that brought Oasis to centre stage – there’s lots to love about Manchester.

VisitBritain/Manchester Craft Beer Festival

A quirky seaside city filled with diverse cuisine, vintage shopping and adrenaline fuelled adventure.

VisitBritain/i360

From The Beatles to Frankie Goes to Hollywood, Liverpool is a UNESCO City of Music with seriously cool credentials.

Oh Me Oh My

Cool creative Bristol is a must-see for art, culture and action-packed adventure.

VisitBritain/Rod Edwards

Step into a land of castles, world-renowned rugby and a whole host of myths and legends.

VisitBritain/Ben Selway

Pushing the boundaries of art and culture and a heart that beats through its people.

VisitBritain/Tommy Ga-Ken Wan

An industrial hub with a vibrant, creative heart and a whole host of quirky adventures.

West Midlands Growth Company

Newcastle upon Tyne

Linked by no fewer than seven bridges, it's one vibrant place to visit.

Rich Kenworthy

Newcastle, England

A hotbed for shopping and the arts, you’ll find lots to explore in Leeds.

VisitBritain/Thomas Heaton

Packed with lively pubs, an eclectic food scene and a myriad of immersive experiences.

Tourism Northern Ireland

Discover annual events

James Bridle

Celebrate in Britain

Find out what’s happening across the nations with our round-up of annual events.

Planning a trip? We're here to help

Your trip to england is just around the corner.

Discover the land of Big Ben, Banksy and bangers and mash. From its bustling cities to its blooming beautiful gardens, it doesn’t disappoint.

Discover Great Britain’s northern reaches

Imagine a country where ancient castles guard mysterious lochs and emerald glens, and where the local spirit is as warm as the welcome.

Discover a land of adventure and mythical creatures

Delve into a world of dragons, renowned choirs, championship rugby, and some of the most spellbinding scenery Britain has to offer.

Your trip to Northern Ireland has never looked more magical

Get swept up in a world of ancient myths and modern-day legends, from the Giant’s Causeway and Game of Thrones to the vibrant buzz of Belfast.

Follow us on Instagram

10 Questions to Ask Yourself Before You Plan Your UK Trip

TripSavvy / Ashley Nicole DeLeon

Planning a trip to the United Kingdom (UK) probably seems pretty easy. The language is almost never a problem, the  visa requirements  are not particularly onerous for vacationers from North and South America, Australasia or Europe, and there's a good choice of ways to arrive and get around.

And, you know, it probably is as easy as all that. You could pop over to London  and take a few  day trips  in the immediate area, then spend a day or two venturing a bit further afield—to  Oxford  or the Cotswolds or  Stratford-upon-Avon —and, hey presto, what a great vacation you've had.

But whether you buy your vacation basics online for yourself or use a travel agent to book a tour, a little advance planning can open your eyes to corners of the UK you never even heard of, let alone thought of visiting.

It's all a matter of asking yourself the right questions. Considering who you really are (from a travel perspective at any rate) and what you really enjoy seeing and doing can turn an okay trip into a great one.

But where do you start? The 10 questions that follow should help keep your vacation planning in sharp focus.

Who Is Going?

Unlike some vacation destinations that are more suitable for couples than families, or older than younger people, the United Kingdom has something for everyone. It's just a question of choosing wisely for your party. Time to zero in on your travel profile.

• A couple planning a romantic trip?  Think about romantic things to do and see , the best places to smooch in Britain or some very nice spots to pop the question .
• A family traveling with children? Young and old will enjoy all the treasures on the Harry Potter trail , the fun at Legoland Windsor, the farm holidays, family cycling, and camping trips. The UK has one of the world's best (and its first) safari parks . And there's even a rich family schedule at the world famous Edinburgh Festival.
• A large group? Plan a trip for   a sports team, a hiking party, a group of cyclists, a clan reunion, a class trip by checking out hostels or the new, more glamorous "poshtels." Or consider large  vacation rentals ; there are some remarkably luxurious homes, suitable for a big family reunion, that are good value on a per person basis.
• Outdoor enthusiasts looking for adventure? The UK's varied national parks have some of the best free hill walks, mountain hikes and sheer cliff climbs in the world. Go fossil hunting on the  Jurassic Coast  and check out the surf on the beaches of Cornwall. Some of the UK's most remote parks in England, Scotland and Wales are now registered as world-class Dark Sky Reserves where you can go star gazing in blissful peace. And if it's an adrenaline rush you're after, check out the Northern Hemisphere's fastest zip line in Wales.
• Millennials and party animals? The UK has some of the best rock and pop festivals in the world and almost every UK city worth its salt has great clubs and venues for live music and hot DJs.
• Mature and looking for peaceful surroundings? Try one of the UK's lovely country house hotels, where accommodations range from traditional to modern boutique, where spa retreats and pools are common and where the food is almost always superb.
• Pet owners? Learn about the UK Pet Travel Scheme  that makes it easier than ever to bring the family pet along on your travels.

Being clear about exactly who is going to the UK—to the members of your party, yourself, and your travel agent —narrows the infinity of choices and makes planning your UK trip that much easier.

How Much Can You Spend?

How much will a vacation in the UK cost? There's no upper limit and minimums depending on the season, the last minute deals you can find, where you are starting out from, and so forth. Consider these prices as approximate guidelines.

Getting There

The round trip fare for two people flying to London from an East Coast USA departure point varies from about $1,200 to more than $4,000 depending upon the time of year.

• How to save: The price of some package tours (including car and hotel) can be less than booking a flight alone. Most of the big transatlantic operators, including American Airlines, British Airways, and Virgin Atlantic, offer good value packages. Before you book a hotel, flight, and car separately, spend some time searching for cheap packages.

Getting Around

Renting the smallest car with a manual transmission will cost between $350-$500 for a couple of weeks. To that, add the cost of gasoline and you'll see that renting a car, in a country with excellent trains and public transportation, may not be such a good idea.

You can save by using other ways to get around. Take the Underground in London , try Britain's rail services, and  take the train . For total freedom, buy a BritRail pass . Even cheaper:  hop on a bus .

Accommodations

The average price of a night in a UK hotel in 2020, was just under £100—but the average price of acceptable hotel accommodation in most major cities was still above £100, with London and Edinburgh leading at about £200. Check out some of these ideas on how to save on accommodations. And if your aim is London, have a look at some cheaper places to stay just outside the capital.

Food and Drink

Expect to pay a minimum of £25-£30 per person per day. If you're really on a very tight budget, these are some ways to save on food and drink .

From £10 to £25+ per adult, per attraction. You can save a great deal by buying a UK discount pass . Some of them are only available to overseas visitors and are remarkably good value.

How Much Time Do You Have in the UK?

Trying to fit too much into your UK vacation is bound to leave you feeling rushed and unsatisfied. But you probably don't cross oceans very often so you will want to make the most of the time you have. Consider these planning approaches.

The Short Break

If you have a week or less, you could either:

• Plan a two-center vacation : You might visit two cities that you find interesting—London and Edinburgh or London and Glasgow are popular combinations—or plan a short city break with some adventure at the beach or in a national park. 
• Use a city as a hub : If you base yourself in one of the UK's main urban hubs you can explore it and take one or two-day trips to nearby towns or scenic regions. Most UK cities are well connected, by bus and rail, to their surrounding region.

If you make your hub city or your vacation centers places with good international airport connections , good rail hubs, and good road connections for venturing further afield, you'll have more stress-free time to spend on your vacation. These locations are all well connected:

• Manchester  (handy for Liverpool too)

The Longer Vacation

If you have two weeks or more... You should have plenty of time to visit one of the UK's leading cities and do some touring as well. You might:

• Try using several cities, in different parts of the UK as a base for further exploring. Combine London with York and Edinburgh, for example, Cardiff with Birmingham and Manchester or Glasgow. There are loads of opportunities for exploring historic sites, family attractions , castles , and stately homes within an easy train or car journey of most UK cities.
• Spend a few days in a city and then take off on an in-depth exploration of a region. Some adventurous fell walking in the Lake District , for example, combines well with the UK's indie music city, Manchester. Edinburgh or Glasgow pair well with Loch Lomond and The Trossachs National Park. London makes a good partner for some time spent exploring Suffolk —the England of dreams, and East Anglia .
• Take on a long distance hike , cycle or mountain bike trek along one of the UK's national paths, like The South Downs Way or the 7stanes Trails.

When Do You Want to Travel?

The UK has pretty much a two-season climate . Spring and autumn are both just brief, passing hints of summer and winter. Which of the two main seasons you choose will influence the price you pay and what you'll be able to do.

Visiting the United Kingdom in Summer

Summer is the high season. Prices for accommodation, flights, and local tours are at their most expensive. If you come in the summer—essentially from May through mid-September—here's what that premium price will get you:

• Very long days so more time for touring and outdoor activities. Through mid-August, it will be light enough to be outdoors until after 10 p.m. in some parts of the country
• English gardens at their best and open longer hours
• The Edinburgh Festivals
• Glastonbury and lots of other music festivals

Visiting the United Kingdom in Winter

Prices are lowest from mid-October to the end of March, but the days are also shortest. In mid-winter, lights may be on all day in bad weather. Sunset before 5 p.m. is typical of December and January.

If you enjoy indoor activities, shopping, museums, theatres, dining out, and nightlife, you can save a bundle and have a very good time in the United Kingdom in the winter. Here's some of what you can look forward to:

• European-style Christmas markets all over the country
• The best and the newest theatre in all the big cities
• Bargain rates or bargain breaks at hotels and other accommodations
• Wonderful Christmas choir concerts in the UK's historic cathedrals
• Fire festivals in England and Scotland
• Hogmanay , Beer Festivals, and Up Helly As a Viking festival all over the place.

Where Do You Want to Go?

People sometimes forget that there's a lot more to the UK than England. This is, after all, a United Kingdom of England, Scotland, Wales, and Northern Ireland. And each nation of the UK has its own distinctive personality.

Probably the most varied of the UK's nations, England offers urban lifestyles, country living, empty beaches, rugged coasts, national parks, historic touring, markets, shopping, lakes, hikes, riding, cycling—a kind of United Kingdom in miniature.

Scotland is the emptiest of the nations of the UK with great, beautiful stretches of highlands, dramatic lochs, rolling borderlands and upland moors. It also has two of the UK's most exciting cities, Glasgow and Edinburgh, and some of it's wildest holiday celebrations.

Wales is more rural than most of the UK. It has storybook pretty valleys and wonderful areas for walking. In Snowdonia , it has the highest UK mountain outside of Scotland as well as several brilliant waterfalls and cascades. In 2017, the view from the top of Snowdonia was voted the best view in Britain in a survey of 3,500 visitors. And, if you like castles, this is the place to be. Wales also has gorgeous beaches and miles of protected, heritage coastline. If you tour and visit local pubs, you are likely to hear Welsh spoken as a first language in parts of North Wales.

Northern Ireland

Belfast is experiencing a cultural revival and Northern Ireland is finally being discovered by visitors. Ulster, as it is also known, has lovely, rural landscapes, dramatic coastal features like the Giant's Causeway and some of the UK's oldest historic monuments. It has maintained an open border with Eire (the Republic of Ireland), but following the U.K.'s official withdrawal from the EU ( Brexit ), this open border policy may change.

What Do You Like to Do?

Are you outdoorsy? A history or literature buff? Mad for shopping and pampering? Maybe you like museums? The beach? Wonderful scenery to photograph?

The nice thing about the UK is that it has all the variety you might expect of a country with its rich and long heritage. Yet it's all packed into a relatively small land mass. With so much within easy reach, you could drive yourself mad trying to do and see everything. Far better to plan your trip around one or two kinds of activities you really enjoy.

Outdoors and Active

There are plenty of opportunities for hiking, cycling, riding, sailing, and more adventurous sports like hang gliding, scuba diving, and spelunking. Here are a few ideas:

• Scenic walks and rugged hikes around Balmoral
• Exploring UK national parks
• Diving shipwrecks in Scapa Flow

Shopping, Clubbing, Dining Out

You're not just limited to London and its high prices. Here's just a sampling of what else is available:

• Birmingham—A shoppers paradise with a hot music scene
• Liverpool—The Beatles hometown and a historic maritime center
• Manchester—Clubland and indie music central. Plus two great football teams.
• Discount designer shopping
• Leeds' Glamorous Shopping Arcades

From castles, stately homes , museums, and historic gardens to literary icons of the English language, you are never far from the UK's rich cultural heritage.

What Kind of Accommodations Do You Prefer?

To some degree, where you decide to stay on your first or your fiftieth visit to the UK will be a matter of price. But there are other things to consider when you are choosing the kind of accommodation you'll opt for in the UK. The way you travel (tour or stay put) the amount of do-it-for-yourself you're up for, the way you do or do not make friends on vacation are all factors. So what kind of digs will you choose?

If you are touring, staying one night here, one night there, a cheap chain hotel might be an adequate and reliable choice. On the other hand, if you are looking for a luxury or romantic experience, fine dining, bags of charm, a country house hotel might be a choice that provides indulgence for less than you might pay for similar luxury in a city.

Vacation Home Rentals

Vacation home rentals are great for independent travelers who like to cook their own meals, come and go as they please. They're also a good and money saving choice for families and groups. And these days, there a lot of amazing, historic vacation rentals available— Agatha Christie's summer home , for example, or a 14th-century hall house hidden behind brambles worthy of Sleeping Beauty.

Like a friendly environment and a chance to meet lots of people? A hostel  (or these days, a "poshtel") might be just the trick; they're a lot more comfortable, clean and convenient than you might think. Or, if you are ready to graduate from couch surfing, Airbnb is just as popular—with just as many opportunities and risks—in the UK as it is in most other countries.

Bed and Breakfasts

B&Bs can offer great breakfasts, warm and friendly hosts, good locations and loads of charm without massive expense. But choose wisely. A grim B&B with an intrusive or unpleasant landlady can be dire. The AA—The UK Automobile Association—publishes an authoritative guide to the best B&Bs .

House swap to live like a local for free. It's safer and easier than ever before. And there is house swapping choices in all the cool places.

If you like living under canvas, there's no shortage of camping opportunities in the UK. There is both wild (tent) and caravan (RV) camping all over the UK. Many RV parks are open year round.

Are You a Conservative or an Adventurous Diner?

The kinds of food you prefer to eat or the amount of cooking you are prepared to do for yourself can make a big difference for both your budget and the places you choose to go.

The myth that English food is terrible is exactly that—a myth. It is possible to find food that is more than acceptable all over the UK and there are plenty of opportunities for fine dining too. It is also possible to explore a very broad range of ethnic dining styles including Indian, Balti, Singaporean, Chinese, Thai, Moroccan, Tunisian and, if you have an adventurous palate, you can dine very well for a good deal less money. Here are some other things to think about when planning your vacation:

• If you like to try a different style of food every night, London is the place to be.
• Some of the best seafood in the UK is available in the Southwest (Devon and Cornwall), on the Northeast coast, and in Scotland.
• Cities with big ethnic populations have excellent ethnic restaurants. The Balti —a derivative of Pakistani cooking—is amazing in Birmingham.
• If you're traveling with a family of fussy eaters, vacation home rental, hostelling or apartment hotels with their own kitchenettes may be your best bets.

Dressy or Casual: Which Do You Prefer?

Do you enjoy dressing for dinner or are you more of a jeans and t-shirt traveler? There are very few occasions when you really have to pull out all the stops when going out in the UK. In most cases, you can wear whatever you are most comfortable in when dining out. There are a few exceptions. Here's what to expect:

• Some of the most exclusive restaurants and hotel dining rooms in London require men to wear a jacket and tie (the Ritz , for example) but that kind of formality is on the wane.
• What the British call "smart casual" (which basically means you've made an effort and it shows, but you haven't gone over the top) is acceptable in most nicer restaurants.
• If you like to go clubbing and you want to get into the best clubs, you have to look the part. Bring your hippest club gear or buy some when you arrive. If you think you can get into a nightclub in jeans and a t-shirt, plan on being Taylor Swift or Beyoncé.
• Some country house hotels will expect you to "dress for dinner" but most won't. Smart casual is usually more than acceptable. If you are planning to stay at a very grand country house hotel, it is worth asking about dressing for dinner before you leave home—just in case.
• Going to the theater or a concert does not require dressing up unless you feel like it.
• If you are heading for the races at Ascot, the Henley Regatta , or Glorious Goodwood, a very smart dress is the rule. For women a smart skirt suit or a flowery dress (and on Ladies Day, a hat); for men, suit and a tie. Many men choose to wear formal morning suits and top hats on Ladies' Day at Ascot—but if you have not been invited to the Royal enclosure, don't worry about it.

How Will You Travel to the UK?

If you are flying to the UK—and most non-European visitors do—you have a bigger choice of airports than you might imagine. Most visitors choose Heathrow or Gatwick but, if you are able to fly into one of the UK's other international airports, you could save money or land more conveniently at your ultimate destination.

If you are lucky enough to cruise to the UK, you'll likely arrive at Southampton, Harwich, or the new luxury cruise port in Liverpool. You can give yourself the experience of arriving in the UK by sea and, for example, seeing the White Cliffs of Dover, without the commitment of an ocean cruise. Fly into a European city—Amsterdam, Paris, Brussels, Dublin, Belfast—and take a ferry. Ferries from Ireland come into the UK at Fishguard in southwest Wales, Holyhead in northwest Wales and Liverpool. Ferries from Continental Europe arrive at a range of the English Channel and North Sea ports.

The Channel Tunnel has made a world of difference to traveling to the UK from Continental Europe. It is now much easier than ever before to combine a European touring vacation with a trip to the UK, with or without a car.

• If you are driving, take the  Eurotunnel Car Transport Shuttle , also known as The Chunnel, from near Calais to Folkestone.
• Touring without a car? Take the Eurostar from Paris and other continental points, direct to London in about 2 hours and 15 minutes. BritRail Pass holders can book Eurostar tickets at a discount.

10 Great Reasons to Visit the United Kingdom

Your Trip to the United Kingdom: The Complete Guide

Top UK Destinations for Stone Circles and Ancient Sites

17 Best Romantic Things to Do in the United Kingdom

Your Trip to Edinburgh: The Complete Guide

The Best Time to Visit the United Kingdom

How to Travel From London to Paris by Train, Bus, Plane, and Car

Getting Around Britain - A Guide to Transportation Options

Use an Alternative UK International Airport to Save a Bundle

Britrail Passes for Unlimited UK Train Travel and Cheap Touring Options

Your Trip to Birmingham, England: The Complete Guide

5 Things to Never Do in the United Kingdom

12 "Must-See" Places in England, Scotland and Wales

Useful Maps of Europe for Planning a Trip

Driving in the UK

Top 20 Most Popular UK Cities for International Visitors

3 Weeks in England Itinerary

DISCLAIMER: This post might have links to travel services and products that we enjoy. We might make a commission from it at no extra cost to you.

There’s more to England than the castles, their posh accent, and the Royal Family. There’s also fish and chips, bangers and mash, and shepherd’s pie. But aside from these, you’ll get entranced with the scenery, history, and culture.

London has some of the best museums in the world and it is also included in the top 4 fashion capitals of the world. Aside from that, they have an extremely wide variety of tea.

At least once in your lifetime, you have to attend a music festival in England. Most of the world-famous bands and musicians hail from this place. England is the largest country in the UK in terms of both population and landmass.

When it comes to exploring the natural and wilderness, England also has something to offer. There is the Lake District in Cumbria, which is not far from Scotland’s border. All of this is just the tip of the iceberg as there are many things to see in England. This itinerary will help you plan a vacation for 3 weeks in England.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE GOING TO ENGLAND

Here are some tips that you need to know before we jump right into the itinerary. These tips can help you plan and write your itinerary for England to ensure that your vacation will have as little hassle as possible.

Perhaps you want to make your vacation a 3 weeks in the UK and Ireland trip instead. If you feel like 20 days in England is too much time, you can upgrade your vacation to 3 weeks in the UK . We also have an itinerary for 3 weeks in Ireland and Northern Ireland .

When is the best time to go to England

England’s peak season is from July to August . The best time to visit depends on what you plan to do. June to August is England’s warmest month, perfect for people who are fond of the beach and watersports.

Their winter season is from November to March, although it rains a lot more in England than it does in snow. England’s. The spring season is from March to May. It’s the time for sudden rain showers so make sure to always bring umbrellas or rain gear if you decide to come and their peak season is from July to August.

Are 3 weeks enough for England

3 weeks in England is plenty of time. You can travel a little slower and explore places that most tourists don’t get to see. Instead of focusing only on London, you can not just take day trips to southern and northern England.

Y ou will probably visit 6-7 cities in England in under 20 days . You can rent a car and travel slower. You can also take the bus and trains since you won’t be in a hurry. It’s not a very big country, but there are lots of things to do.

What to pack

Regardless of when you plan to visit England, it’s vital that you bring an umbrella or a raincoat since it can pour any time of the year. But other than that, pack according to what season you plan to visit.

England has some really great hiking trails. So, If you want to go hiking, you should bring hiking shoes or boots. Check out our what to pack for a 3-week trip and look at the sample packing list. We also have a summer packing list for a 3-week holiday .

Average cost of 20 days in England

On an average budget, a 20-day trip to England could cost roughly $2,500-$3,500 per person . This includes mid-range accommodations, meals at casual restaurants, public transportation, and regular tourist attractions.

For backpackers, expect to spend around $1,200-$1,800 . This involves staying in budget accommodations like hostels, eating at inexpensive eateries or self-catering, using public transport, and focusing on free or low-cost activities.

A luxury 2 0-day trip could cost from $5,000 to $8,000 per person , incorporating upscale accommodations, fine dining, private or first-class transportation, and premium experiences like guided tours or high-end shopping.

Note that costs could vary significantly depending on personal preferences and lifestyle. Plus, it doesn’t include your flights to and from England and travel insurance.

How to get around

Getting around England is fairly easy due to its size and well-built public transportation. It is very recommended that you rent your own car if you plan to stay for 3 weeks in England. It will give you plenty of freedom and control of your time rather than waiting and trying to catch the bus or the train.

Another way to travel in England is by taking the train, especially for long journeys and the cheapest way is by coaches. You can also travel by car or through their coasts and waterways. You can move around by car, railway, bus, or by renting a push bike to move around the cities.

Language and Currency

England’s currency is the pound sterling (GBP) . Debit cards, credit cards, and contactless payments are common in Britain. You will be able to find ATMs in almost every corner of the country. If you plan to carry cash about £100 in total would be plenty.

The main language in England is English . In some iconic landmarks, you might see things written in different languages, although rare. It’s such a melting pot of a city though, you will hear lots of languages and culture around England, especially in London.

Visitors with passports from North America, Latin America, Europe, East Asia, and some Oceania don’t need a visa to enter and travel to the UK for 180 days.

Other visitors must apply for a tourist or visitor visa in advance at the nearest British/UK Embassy or Consulate.

Other travel tips

Arranging flights, hotels, and other travel arrangements is done online now. Knowing which sites you can book these things without paying too much is very helpful. I use these travel tools whenever booking my accommodations and transportation.

PINNED MAP OF MUST-SEE PLACES IN ENGLAND

Click the enlarge button on the top right corner. Credit: map data: Google

3 WEEKS IN ENGLAND ITINERARY

Exploring England means visiting many historical spots and iconic landmarks and structures, including Big Ben, London Bridge, London Eye, Stonehenge, and the red phone booth, to name a few.

England is passionate when it comes to sports, and the locals take them very seriously . This includes football, cricket, tennis, and rugby. If England is not enough for you, you can always make an itinerary that covers the entire Western Europe for 3 weeks .

London for 5 days

3 weeks in England have to include London especially if you haven’t been here before. There are so many things to see in London, including the world’s largest library, exquisite architecture, museums, and exhibition spaces.

London is most likely where you will start your trip since the major hub of Heathrow Airport is here . From London, you should be able to reach any city in England or the UK. There will be trains, metros, buses, and planes traveling in all directions. London also has an extensive theatre scene and diverse food and cuisine options.

When you are in London, you must see a theatre show at least once. I also recommend you get a hop-on hop-off bus ticket to make moving around a little easier.

Things to see in London

• Tower of London and Crown of Jewels – you can book a tour
• Tower Bridge and Big Ben
• Join a fun Harry Potter guided walking tour and get a ticket to Harry Potter Warner Bros Studio
• The British Museum
• Kensington Palace – you can join a sightseeing tour
• Buckingham Palace
• Book a spooky Jack the Ripper tour
• Westminster Abbey – hop on a boat cruise from Westminster to Greenwich
• The National Gallery
• London Eye – you can get a fast-track ticket to save time
• Picadilly Circus and Trafalgar Square
• Madame Tussauds – visit one of the most popular museums in London, get your entry ticket
• Windsor Castle – get your admission ticket
• The Shard – you can get a ticket to enjoy a panoramic view

Accommodations in London

• Affordable: Hootananny Hostel or Dover Castle Hostel or The Phoenix Hostel
• Mid-range: Central Hotel or Keystone House or Studios2Let
• Luxury: The Londoner or The Ampersand Hotel or One Hundred Shoreditch

Manchester, Liverpool, Sheffield, Leeds for 5 days

These four cities can definitely be explored in one go – but choose which city you want to be your home for 5 days. These cities are near one another, so getting from one place to another shouldn’t be a problem.

Manchester is where the first professional football league was formed . You could also enjoy traces and the legacy of the 25 Nobel prize awardees throughout the place. On the other hand, Liverpool is a ferry and cruise port and is famous for its ferry trips , the Liverpool Cathedral, and Royal Albert Dock, among others.

Sheffield is one of the greenest cities in the UK despite being coined as a steel city because it produces steel. They have Sheffield Legends Plaques, the counterpart of Hollywood’s Walk of Fame.

Leeds is famous for housing the oldest commercial railway in the world , having the world’s most significant animal armor, and having the longest-running West Indian Carnival in Europe.

While exploring Northern England, you can base yourself in Manchester or Liverpool, which has plenty of hotels. Getting from these cities to other parts of this region is very easy.

Things to see in these cities

Manchester :

• Explore Manchester on a city bus – get your ticket
• Castlefield Canals
• Science and Industry Museum
• Coronation Street – explore with a local guide
• Manchester Cathedral
• National Football Museum – check the tour itinerary
• The Whitworth
• Book a canal cruise – check the tour price
• Enjoy a day trip to the North of Wales, Snowdonia, and Chester or a day trip to the Lake District and Windermere
• Sign up for a food tour or Cheese crawl

Liverpool :

• Penny Lane and Strawberry Fields
• Tate Liverpool
• World War II Museum – get your ticket
• Merseyside Maritime Museum
• Mersey River – book a cruise
• Croxteth Hall
• Enjoy a Beatles tour / Beatles Story – blue route bus tour or a private taxi tour
• Birkenhead Park
• Liverpool Football Stadium (Anfield) – join a tour
• Peaky Blinders filming locations – tour with a guide
• Book a ghosting walking tour – look at the itinerary

Sheffield :

• Peak District – you can do a Scavenger hunt
• Sheffield Botanical Gardens
• Graves Park
• Kelham Island Museum
• Abbeydale Industrial Hamlet
• Sheffield Town Hall
• Beauchief Abbey and Ancient Woodlands
• Book a walking tour with a local guide
• Civic Quarter
• Leeds Castle – you can book a day trip from London
• The Headrow
• Book a food tour – read the reviews
• The Royal Armories Museum
• Harewood House
• North Yorkshire Cruise – 1-hour cruise or a cruise with afternoon tea
• Leeds Industrial Museum
• Harrogate – there’s a food tour you can join
• The National Coal Mining Museum

Accommodations in Manchester

• Affordable to Mid-range Hotel: Church Street or The Gardens Hotel or Yotel Deansgate
• Luxury: Stock Exchange Hotel or CitySuites Aparthotel or Hotel Gotham

Bristol for 3 days

After visiting such bustling cities, you will be glad to have arrived in Bristol. It’s where you’ll see more open space and green areas. It’s where you can go for a walk along the boardwalk or hike at the Mendip Hills National Landscape. It’s also near Bath , where you can enjoy the relaxing spa and traditional baths.

Bristol is truly an astounding place filled with different forms of art and creative outlets, which vary in each area. Stokes Croft is filled with vintage stores, indie cafes, and street art . Clifton has a variety of concept stores, and Bedminster is where the Upfest Art Festival is held.

The perfect duration of stay here for those spending three weeks in England would be about three days.

If you are coming from Leeds, you could reach Bristol by boarding a train, riding a bus, using rideshare, driving, or even flying. The most recommended option is to ride the train; the bus is the cheapest. Driving would take more or less three hours to reach your destination.

Things to see in Bristol

• Explore Bristol through its street art – hire a guide
• Bristol Floating Harbour
• St. Mary Redcliffe
• Brunel’s SS Great Britain
• Clifton Suspension Bridge and Vaults – book with a tour guide
• Cheddar Gorge
• Try axe throwing – check what’s include
• Bristol Old City
• Learn how to make a cocktail

Accommodations in Bristol

• Affordable: The Full Moon Backpackers or The Washington
• Mid-range: The Alma Taverns Boutique Suites or Arnor Manor Hotel
• Luxury: Leonardo Hotel or Number 38 Cliffton or Clayton Hotel

Brighton for 3 days

Brighton is known for festivals that showcase local and international talents. Some of the world-famous festivals include the Fringe Festival and The Brighton Festival, among dozens of other festivals and live shows.

Brighton is also well-known for its beaches and shoreline paths, where people can easily walk and cycle. Sit by the beach, order fish and chips, and spend some time watching boats and ferries passing through the English Channel.

For those who want to go to Brighton from Bristol, you can take the train, ride the bus, or drive with the most recommended option is boarding the train, and the cheapest option would be riding a bus. Driving is about three hours before reaching your destination (this is the fastest option).

When you get to Brighton, make sure to get a hop-on-hop-off bus ticket . The bus stops at famous attractions in Brighton. This will make your exploration much easier.

Things to see in Brighton

• Royal Pavilion and Brighton Museum – reserve your ticket
• Brighton Fishing Museum and Marina
• Explore Brighton on a guided walking tour
• The Lanes and North Laine
• I360 Viewing Tower – get your ticket in advance
• Regency Square and Houses around it
• Brighton Toy and Model Museum
• Exciting day trip to Seven Sisters and South Downs – see tour price
• Try zipline along the beach
• Book a Drag Queen Show on a bottomless brunch – check the price
• Day trip to Stonehenge and Bath from Brighton

Accommodations in Brighton

• Affordable to Mid-range: EI8HT Brighton or Selina Brighton or The Beach Hotel
• Luxury: Drakes Hotel or The Charm Boutique Hotel & Spa or Jurys Inn Waterfront

Cambridge for 3 days

Cambridge is usually known as the world-famous university under its namesake. But aside from that, this city has so much to offer. It has dazzling architecture, museums, retail markets, and tons of lush greeneries.

It’s home to many students and has a really lively scene. So, if you’re looking to party outside London, you’ll definitely find some spots along Sydney Street.

To get to Cambridge from Brighton , you can either take the train, bus or drive on your own. It takes 2 and a half hours to reach Cambridge. There’s also a hop-on-hop-off bus for touring around Cambridge.

Things to see in Cambridge

• Visit top attractions in Cambridge on a walking tour
• Anglesey Abbey, Gardens, and Lode Mill
• King’s College – explore with an alumni guide
• Mathematical Bridge
• Cambridge University Botanical Garden – you can also enjoy the popular punting tour or the Uni Tour
• The Fitzwilliam Museum
• Cambrige Central Mosque
• National Horse Racing Museum

Accommodations in Cambridge

• Affodable to Mid-range: YHA Cambridge or Rectory Farm or The Tas Suites
• Luxury: West Court or Gonville Hotel or Centennial Hotel

SUMMARY OF 3 WEEKS IN ENGLAND ITINERARY

If you think we’ve already covered everything England offers, you’re in for a wild ride because this isn’t even the tip of the iceberg. England is a country full of eccentricities, and what’s great about them is that they embrace their quirkiness.

Their strangest sport is chasing cheese down the hill. They also have a ceremony called apple wassail, wherein they bless apple trees to produce good crops, which would then be used in making cider. England has a traditional folk dance called Morris Dancing.

Witnessing all of these up close would make your trip worthwhile. And that’s it, you have now reached the end of this itinerary about staying for 3 weeks in England. We hope that you enjoyed this article.

SAVE THIS TRAVEL ITINERARY ON YOUR PINTEREST:

Navigate forward to interact with the calendar and select a date. Press the question mark key to get the keyboard shortcuts for changing dates.

Navigate backward to interact with the calendar and select a date. Press the question mark key to get the keyboard shortcuts for changing dates.

England Trip Planner

Top destinations in england.

Top attractions in England

Other notable attractions

Explore nearby places

• Stratford City
• Waltham Forest
• Richmond-upon-Thames
• Kingston upon Thames
• Worcester Park
• West Wickham

All related maps of England

• Map of England
• Map of London
• Map of Willesden
• Map of Haringey
• Map of Stratford City
• Map of Mitcham
• Map of Ealing
• Map of Morden
• Map of Wembley
• Map of Waltham Forest
• Map of Beckenham
• Map of Richmond-upon-Thames
• Map of Croydon
• Map of Bromley
• Map of Barking
• Map of Ilford
• Map of Twickenham
• Map of Greenford
• Map of Redbridge
• Map of New Malden
• Map of Kingston upon Thames
• Map of Edgware
• Map of Woodford
• Map of Wallington
• Map of Carshalton
• Map of Isleworth
• Map of Worcester Park
• Map of West Wickham
• Map of Enfield
• Map of Harrow

England throughout the year

• England in January
• England in February
• England in March
• England in April
• England in May
• England in June
• England in July
• England in August
• England in September
• England in October
• England in November
• England in December

Q&A about England

Add places from guides with 1 click, collaborate with friends in real time, import flight and hotel reservations, expense tracking and splitting, checklists for anything, get personalized suggestions.

4.9 on App Store, 4.7 on Google Play

16 local tips to know before traveling to England

Jul 13, 2023 • 7 min read

These top tips will help you be prepared for anything on your trip to England © SolStock / Getty Images

Such is England’s reach on popular culture, you may think you already know the country before you visit.

Though if you’re expecting to be surrounded by a bunch of well-heeled James Bonds or a gaggle of eccentric Monty Python characters, then think again.

While the everyday English aren’t quite the same as how they’re portrayed in film, television and books, this is a country with a number of peculiarities that are good to know before visiting, especially when venturing outside of London . From practicalities like train prices to etiquette tips on how the English approach queueing, it’s always important to be ahead of the game when visiting this wonderful and varied country.

Here are a few key things to know before traveling to England.

1. You should pack a jacket, even in summer

Preparing for all types of weather is an essential part of the English experience. England’s maritime location in the wild North Atlantic means that even in summer , biting winds and untimely rain showers can unexpectedly scupper a balmy afternoon. 

That doesn’t mean you need to take an umbrella everywhere, but you do need to put a jacket in your suitcase and always check the conditions on your favorite weather app before venturing out. As a rule, London is usually a couple of degrees warmer than other parts of the country.

2. Be ready to discuss the weather 

Talking about the weather is in the English blood and a part of the national psyche. And the more lamentable the forecast, the more likely people are to talk about it. Come rain or shine, prepare to offer an opinion on the day’s weather, and express that it’ll hopefully brighten up/cool down as the week goes on. 

3. Train prices are steep

Unlike some other countries in western Europe , England’s train system was privatized many years ago, and this, along with other factors, has lead to some of Europe’s highest train prices.

Try to book ahead of time (around 12 weeks before travel for the best rates) and look out for cheap advance fares. While not as quick as train travel (and certainly not as romantic), coaches such as National Express and Megabus offer far cheaper prices when traveling across the country and are highly recommended for those on a budget. 

4. There’s a whole world outside of London

London’s big, bold, and full of iconic English landmarks and experiences . But it isn’t everything. If you have the time to explore beyond the capital, you’ll discover a variety of landscapes, people and cultures, and some wonderful things to do . 

From the wild coastlines of Cornwall to the soaring hills of the Lake District , there’s much to see in this ancient land. 

5. Crossing the English Channel means different plug sockets

Yes, England is in Europe, but it doesn’t always play by European rules (in more ways than one, with Brexit still something that people can't agree on seven years after the vote). If you’re backpacking around Europe, remember that the UK and Ireland use type G plug sockets (three rectangular pins in a triangular pattern), so make sure you have the right power adapter when arriving in England as it differs from the rest of the continent. 

6. Many museums are free

England is home to many of the world’s greatest museums , and you won’t need to pay a penny to enter some of them. Especially great for rainy days in London, you can peruse dinosaurs at the Natural History Museum or masterpieces by Turner at the National Gallery and spend the money saved at the pub later on.

7. Pronouncing place names will be a challenge

Alongside some truly bizarre place names, England also has several towns and counties that aren’t pronounced the way they are spelled. Names with a -ter suffix are particularly notorious for this.

Bicester is pronounced biss-ter rather than bi-ces-ter, Gloucester is pronounced gloss-ter rather than glou-ces-ter, Leominster is pronounced lem-ster rather than Leo-minster. You get the picture. 

8. Hit the beer garden when the sun comes out

The English need no excuse to go to the pub on a sunny summer afternoon, and sitting indoors is almost unthinkable. Find a table in the beer garden at the local boozer and order in a few cold pints. Job done.

9. Expect to hear a different accent in each region

Traveling just a few short miles in England can often mean a change in accent, so train your ears to prepare for this. Regional accents are hugely diverse, and while they’re still English, they can sometimes be difficult for even fellow England residents to understand. 

The accent you’ll hear in Birmingham ("Brummie") differs wildly to what you’ll hear when you arrive in Newcastle ("Geordie"). London is a separate case as it’s so cosmopolitan that you can expect to hear a variety of different accents and languages throughout the day.

10. Never jump a queue

Sometimes polite to a fault, the English are very orderly when queueing, and those who jump a line can expect stern looks and grumbling at the very least. So get in line and patiently wait your turn to avoid any awkward situations.

11. You’ll hear "sorry" a lot

Even in situations where the fault lies with you, you might receive an apology. Only Canadians say sorry more than the English, so get used to hearing it and, eventually, saying it.

12. English food does not deserve its negative reputation

Stereotypes about the English are often amusing and sometimes painfully true, though the one about the poor standard of English food can be comfortably consigned to history’s trashcan. 

Towns and cities across the country are now dotted with superb restaurants offering a strong emphasis on fresh and locally grown produce. Alongside traditional dishes , you’ll find cuisine here from all over the world amid an ever-growing list of Michelin-starred restaurants. 

13. Beer standards are high too

The pub is a rite of passage here, and the English love a pint of beer. But England has grown out of its cruel 1970s caricature of warm stale beer, and these days, there are myriad styles to sample, up and down the country. 

From real ales at historic Victorian pubs to craft beer at bright modern taprooms, choose from sours, stouts, saisons, New England IPAs and beyond. 

14. Summer is festival season

From Glastonbury in June to Reading and Leeds in August and everything in between, there are lively music festivals running throughout the summer in England. No matter what week you’re here, there’s bound to be a festival on somewhere. Getting tickets for the big events is a challenge, though – you'll need to look out for those around nine months in advance.

There are also a plethora of smaller festivals that are often great value and easier to navigate too, such as Birmingham’s superb Mostly Jazz, Funk & Soul Festival .

15. If you encounter any health issues, you’ll be in good hands

Visitors from EU countries will be covered for some treatment on the National Health Service (NHS) if they fall ill during a visit by using their European Health Insurance Card (EHIC). Visitors from non-EU countries with a reciprocal health care arrangement with the UK may also be covered for some treatment needs, particularly emergencies.

16. Measurements can be confusing

Don’t be surprised if you get into a metric muddle. For some things, the English use metric measurements, and for other things, they use imperial. Though metric measurements became legal in the UK back in 1875, Britain has never fully transitioned to using metrication in all situations. Roads are still measured in the imperial unit of miles, for example, and height is often discussed in feet and inches.

This article was first published June 2022 and updated July 2023

Explore related stories

Apr 19, 2024 • 10 min read

Summer is just around the corner in the northern hemisphere. Here's where the Lonely Planet team is going.

Apr 19, 2024 • 8 min read

Mar 31, 2024 • 6 min read

Mar 30, 2024 • 4 min read

Mar 28, 2024 • 6 min read

Mar 27, 2024 • 9 min read

Mar 22, 2024 • 9 min read

Mar 17, 2024 • 10 min read

Mar 13, 2024 • 6 min read

Mar 11, 2024 • 5 min read

The Ultimate Great Britain Trip Planner

If you’re starting to plan your trip, this great britain trip planner will help you work out when to visit, where to go and how to make the most of your time..

We know that planning a trip to Great Britain might feel a little overwhelming. There are so many great options of places to go and styles of trip to choose between. From hiking trips in Scotland, to city breaks in London and coastal adventures in Wales, there is a lot of variety on our little island.

That’s where our Great Britain trip planner comes in handy. We’ve broken your trip planning down into baby steps, and we’re ready to hold your hand every step of the way!

Haven’t decided on what kind of trip you’d like to go on? We recommend starting here…

The Best Of Britain: 20+ Trips To Add To Your Great British Bucket List

21 Places To Add To Your Great British Bucket List This Year

21 Incredible Great British Experiences To Have This Year

Pick a country.

Now it’s time to a country and start exploring. From pretty English villages, to Scotland’s dramatic landscapes and Wales’ history, you might have trouble picking which country to visit first!

when to visit great britain

Hopefully now you’ve got an idea of the kind of trip you’d like to plan in Great Britain. Now, it’s time to work out when to travel. These guides outline the best times to travel to England, Scotland and Wales based on the different seasons, weather and special events across the countries.

When Is The Best Time To Visit England?

When Is The Best Time To Visit Scotland?

When Is The Best Time To Visit Wales?

What do you love.

Travelling in Great Britain isn’t about ticking off the obvious sights. There are lots of unique things to do in England, Scotland and Wales. What interests you? We’ll help you plan your trip.

Best British Food and Drink

Unique Places to Stay in Great Britain

City Breaks

2 Weeks in England: 3 Itineraries

DISCLAIMER: This post might have links to travel services and products that we enjoy. We might make a commission from it at no extra cost to you.

England is undeniably one of the most well-liked vacation spots in the world, has practically offers a wide selection of exciting things to do and places to venture for any type of visitor. This small but influential nation, a part of the stunning British Isles, is packed with fascinating history, attractive cities, and a wealth of cultural traditions.

There are historical sites wherever you look, including ancient structures, Roman ruins, medieval town centres, and castles dating back hundreds of years.

The United Kingdom is situated between the North Sea and North Atlantic. Belgium, Germany, France, Denmark, Norway, Netherlands, and the Faroe Islands share maritime borders with England.

In this collection of travel itineraries for 2 weeks in England, there are three options for you to choose from depending on what you prefer to see. There is a travel plan for first-time visitors, hiking itinerary, and a guide for those who want to explore the coasts of England.

RELATED POST: 2 weeks in the UK and 2 weeks in Ireland and Northern Ireland itineraries

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE VISITING ENGLAND

Before you book your flight and hotel, check out these basic travel tips for England. Make sure you are visiting at the right time, depending on the activities you plan to do. The following information will also help you write your own travel itinerary that is suitable for you.

When is the best time to go to England

Have you heard of the joke about how much it rains in England? Well, it’s true. But you can still enjoy a sunny day if you plan right. England’s driest time of the year is from February until April. However, this is also the busiest time of the year.

If you want to come here during this time, best book your accommodation in advance. Both to make sure you have a place to stay that is decent in quality and to avoid high costs due to last-minute planning.

The wettest months in England are from autumn until winter. It doesn’t snow that much in England in winter, but it rains most days. If you don’t mind that, it’s a great time to visit in terms of cost. Accommodations are more affordable from September to November. At Christmas, it starts to go up again all the way until January.

Are 2 weeks enough for England

14 days in England is an ideal time. You will be able to cover many magnificent places but also, won’t find yourself with too much extra time feeling bored. If you rent a car to explore outside London, you can maximise your time even more.

If you have two weeks in England, you can definitely visit 3-4 cities. Just make sure to arrange the places according to the distance from one another, so you don’t track back and waste too much time in a train, bus, or car driving around.

Getting around

The best way to get around England is by using public transport; trains and buses. The trains go to pretty much most major cities in England. If you plan to go to rural areas, the bus will surely service there.

You will find ticket machines at the train or bus station that accept card and/or cash payments. Make sure to download the Trainline app to purchase your train tickets in advance.

If you want more freedom of your time, you can rent a car . But only do this once you’re ready to explore outside London. Traffic in London is just not worth your time. It would make more sense to pick up the car in London and drop it off in the exact location, especially if your flight will leave from London anyway.

Language and currency

English is the primary language in England. However, there are many accents as you move around that can be hard to understand at times.

GBP or Great British Pounds (£), is the main currency in England. ATM machines will produce cash in pounds. Payment using a bank card is the most preferred way in England when settling your bill. There are also now e-wallet which might not be possible for you. But remember to always bring cash with you. Around £50 will be ideal in case your card doesn’t work.

England is part of the UK, meaning the government implements the same visa policies as Scotland, Wales, and Northern Ireland.

If you hold a passport from most countries in the Americas (North and Latin America), you can enter and travel around England for six months. The same visa policy for visitors with passports from Australia, New Zealand, Malaysia, Singapore, Japan, South Korea, Namibia, Botswana, Europe, and of course, territories of the British colonies.

You must get an electronic visa waiver if your passport is from Saudi Arabia, Qatar, and UAE. Passport holders of Ireland have freedom of movement in the UK.

What is the average cost for 2 weeks in England

London alone is such an expensive city, England in general for a 2-week trip can cost more than any other country in the world you have been to.

On average, $2,200 for two weeks in England is ideal. Accommodation is the most expensive. Regarding food, you can bring down the cost a little bit. You should also plan to use public transport, which will help to ensure you don’t spend too much.

If a bunk bed and sharing living spaces don’t bother you, a shoestring budget of $1,900 is possible for a 14 days trip in England. But remember that most hostels are located a bit out of the city. Check if you can rent a push bike to help you get around. Instead of booking a tour, you can try to look for “free walking tours” which operate in “tips”.

For those with a budget to go on a luxury trip, $3,500 will be a friendly budget. You won’t be able to stay in 5-star hotels the entire time, but you can book them if you plan to do so outside London. You can eat out and move around using a taxi and ride-hailing apps on this budget.

Other basic travel tips

As mentioned before, it’s best to book things in advance regarding taking a trip to England. Good hotels get books quickly. Don’t worry, many of these travel sites offer flexible cancellations if you change your mind or plans.

PINNED MAP OF TOP THINGS TO SEE IN ENGLAND

Click the icon on the top right to enlarge the map. Credit: map data: Google

2 WEEKS IN ENGLAND ITINERARY

England might be intimidating for newcomers, with plenty of tourists and citizens populating the country. To help you save time, you can use this comprehensive guide to help you plan your trip to easily navigate the cities, seaside destinations, and hiking trails.

The places you can explore on particular days are listed below. I also added a section about what you can do in every city to help you make the best out of your two weeks in England. There are 3 sample itineraries.

Itinerary #1: First-Time Visitor (London, Brighton, Cotswold, Northern England)

If it’s your first visit, I’d suggest concentrating on these areas and taking at least 2 weeks to explore. You can travel quickly and see a new location every day, but if you’d prefer a more leisurely tour, you should probably spend at least 3-4 days in every city, especially considering the transport time.

I must admit that deciding which cities to include in this itinerary has been quite challenging. It is showcased in this two-week in England itinerary if you want to see the best of England. Although many other locations are just as stunning, this tour offers a good variety.

London for 4 days

London, one of the most charming cities in the world, is known for its modern cobblestone streets lined with ancient buildings, award-winning theatres, and modern buildings like The Shard. Some trendy locations are Westminster Abbey, St. Paul’s Cathedral, and Buckingham Palace, all encircled by charming streets.

Generally, Britain’s capital offers a unique experience for everyone, including foodies, adventurers, history buffs, families, and shopaholics.

Big Ben, the 318-foot tower that holds the giant clock and its booming bell, is the best example of what “London” is all about. Several excellent sightseeing choices outside the city are entirely doable on a day trip from London. The two locations that you must visit include Cambridge and Stonehenge.

Brighton for 3 days

With its magnificent peaks that seem more at home in India, The Royal Pavilion, located in the heart of Brighton, is hard to overlook. You can also check out the Brighton Museum & Art Gallery, which is set in the pavilion’s former Royal Stables and Riding School area.

The outstanding Willett Collection of porcelain and ceramics, the remarkable Art Deco collection, and the costume exhibit with 18th-century clothes all make this top-notch museum worthwhile.

A trip to the seaside wouldn’t be complete without stopping by Brighton Palace Pier, surrounded by shops, amusement arcades, and food stalls. The quickest train travel time from London to Brighton is around 1 hr 8 min with a distance of 75 km (47 miles).

Cotswold for 3 days

The Cotswolds’ charming villages and historic market squares, which frequently serve as movie sets, make travelling here like walking into a storybook. Don’t miss out on Bourton-on-the-Water, a charming village that has earned the nickname “Venice of the Cotswolds”, thanks to the clear River Windrush that passes through the centre of the community.

If you’re eyeing antiques, Broadway has numerous stores, art galleries, and cafes along the streets.

Bath has several spa towns, including Thermae Bath Spa, which is right next to the Roman Baths and offers visitors a unique and relaxing experience. There are numerous spa services to choose from, including hot stone therapy and water massages, perfect after a tiring day of exploring.

Travelling from Brighton to Cotswold by car rental would be ideal as it usually takes roughly 2 hr 25 min rather than by train which is around 4 hr 34 min.

Northern England 4 days

The cities in Northern England include Manchester, Leeds, Liverpool, Lancaster, York, Newcastle, Windermere, and Chester. The most popular cities are Manchester and Liverpool because of their popularity in history, sports, and music. The Beatles is from Liverpool, while Oasis is from Manchester, just to name a few.

Many local and foreign visitors go to Liverpool for its football club, but there are lots more attractions to see in Liverpool apart from this. While Leeds features the Royak Armouries Museum and Manchester, it is the place to learn about the atomic theory and the journey of splitting it.

The historic city of York, the spiritual centre of the Church of England, is among Northern England’s most well-known tourist sites. It is home to one of the nation’s most magnificent cathedrals, the York Minister. The ancient City Walls that encircle the former medieval city centre for approximately 5 kilometres are another attraction worth exploring.

You’ll have great views of The Shambles, a street that dates back to the 14th century and is noted for its beautiful wooden buildings, as well as other nearby restaurants, boutique stores, and art galleries, which make this city a great place to end your 2 weeks in England trip.

You can expect the trip from Cotswold to Northern England, which spans 412 km (256 miles), by driving for 4 hr 24 min through the A1 (M) route.

Itinerary #2: Hiking Itinerary (Peak District, Lake District, Yorkshire Dales/Dartmoor National Park)

Apart from the typical tourist destinations, England is the ideal vacation option for anyone who enjoys spending time in nature. There are many hiking trails to discover, and they are all enclosed by the country’s breathtaking scenery, extensive history, and hospitable culture.

Whether you like to wander in the Dartmoor National Park, discover the Lake District, or stroll through the Yorkshire Dales, each provides a unique hiking experience for your upcoming vacation.

I’ve compiled some of England’s most incredible outdoor adventure spots. If you’ve longed to get away from England’s busy cities, this 14-day in England itinerary is ideal.

London for 2 days

If London isn’t part of your itinerary, you can still make the most of your time when you land here. Ensure necessary arrangements before visiting England’s off-the-beaten-track areas, including renting a car, stocking up on cash, getting a local sim card, and purchasing hiking equipment.

Peak District for 3 days

Mam Tor, which translates to “Mother Hill,” is a 517-meter-high hill close to Castleton that genuinely deserves a spot on your bucket list. Another note-worthy hike is the beautiful 46-mile path through the Peak District National Park’s White Peak region, called The Limestone Way.

For quick treks, consider the Bolsover Town Walking Route, which leads you through the historic streets of Bolsover and reveals hidden gems like courtyards, vistas of the surrounding countryside, and even a splendid 13th-century church.

Buxton, Buxton, and Sheffield are the ideal locations to stay if you intend to explore the Peak District. These towns are mainly untouched and have maintained their small-village charm despite the surge of tourists.

I recommend travelling from London to Peak District by high-speed train, which takes 90 to arrive. You can also drive your rented car. The journey will take around 3 hr and 20 mins.

Lake District for 3 days

Helvellyn, one of the tallest peaks in the Lake District, is a favourite trip for experienced and novice climbers. Hikers enjoy Ullswater, where they can travel the 32-km Ullswater Way all around the lake or shorten their trip to 12 kilometres by adding boat rides. You can hike the 451-m high Catbells High Ridge for a quick half-day trip.

If you’re looking for a place to stay, I recommend heading to Ambleside, a small town with numerous restaurants and accommodations. Another excellent option is Penrith, a vibrant market town with sandstone structures famous for its abundance of shops.

Yorkshire Dales National Park or Dartmoor National Park for 3 days

Next up are 2 national parks that I highly recommend: Dartmoor National Park and Yorkshire Dales National Park. If you prefer exploring with less crowd, pick Dartmoor. Choose Yorkshire if you want to stay in the North while driving less. If you’re still undecided, I suggest reading more about them to determine which best suits your preferences.

Witness the might of Hardraw Force, England’s tallest single-drop waterfall, on this challenging 3.5-mile trek starting at Hawes National Park. Soaring 723 m above the landscape is Ingleborough, Yorkshire’s 2nd highest peak and of the most popular hiking sites. If you’re looking for the best accommodation options, consider Hawes, Bainbridge, and Carperby.

If you want to opt for a short but scenic hike, head to Lydford Gorge, where you can glimpse the White Lady Waterfall. For advanced hikers, I recommend the circular route called Burrator, where you could take in some of Southern England’s most stunning sceneries. After days of exploring Dartmoor, a comfortable location to rest is necessary, and you can find one in either Exeter or Plymouth.

I recommend travelling by car from Lake District to Yorkshire Dales since it will only take 50 min, over an estimated 55 km (34 miles) from route 685. Whereas the travel time by car from Lake District to Dartmoor National Park is roughly 5 hr 2 min with a total distance of 523 km (325 miles) along routes M6 and M5.

Itinerary #3: Along the Coasts (Brighton, Dorset, Cornwall, North Devon)

You’re in for a treat when you visit these seaside destinations due to their impressive sea cliffs, wide bays, and magnificent beaches. For those seeking serene beachfront solitude, some of the best beaches are found off the usual path. There are many romantic beaches to choose from along England’s breathtaking coastline, which is perfect for couples.

This itinerary welcomes visitors to laze by the water and enjoy the sun. The beaches of England have excellent surfing waves and a variety of practice areas, making them ideal for both beginners and advanced surfers.

England offers countless vacation options for solo travellers, families, and anyone wishing to spend time by the sea. Many beaches are served by restaurants, hotels, and leading recreational services, including extensive water sports facilities.

Even if London isn’t on your agenda, you may still take advantage of your time once you arrive. Be sure to make all necessary preparations before travelling along the coasts of England for a seamless trip. This includes renting a car, setting aside enough cash, obtaining a local sim card, and buying goods.

Long before the establishment of the railway, Brighton was already a well-known seaside destination with several outstanding beaches suited for sunbathing and swimming. For water sports enthusiasts, head to Brighton Beach, where you can enjoy kayaking, sailing, and surfing. Another option is Kemptown Beach which a short 15-minute walk can reach along Brighton Palace Pier for those who prefer a less crowded beach.

Set at the base of a stunning row of white chalk cliffs, the beach along Undercliff Walk is a popular diving and snorkelling spot with many rockpools to explore. The train journey from London to Brighton is around 1 hr 8 min, covering a distance of 75 km (47 miles).

Dorset for 3 days

There are more than a dozen Bournemouth beaches to select from, stretching approximately 10 miles of the breathtaking Dorset coastline. If you begin your adventure of Dorset in Bournemouth, ensure enough time for a trip to Brownsea Island.

The Jurassic Coast in England, which stretches 96 miles from Exmouth beaches, is still the sole World Heritage Site in the country and is packed with options for exploration. Undoubtedly, Weymouth Harbour is one of the top places in England for a typical seaside holiday, a weekend break, or even a day trip.

I recommend travelling by car from Brighton to Dorset since it will only take 2 hr 17 min, over an estimated 182 km (113 miles) from routes A27 and A31.

Cornwall for 3 days

One of Cornwall’s loveliest beaches, St. Ive’s Porthiminster Beach, offers a great view of the Godrevy Lighthouse from across glittering water. You can also visit Porthmeor Beach, a trendy beach with neighbouring cafes and restaurants. The finest natural scenery is available in St Ives Bay, and boarding a cruise is one of Cornwall’s top things to do.

For those who want to relax and play by the shoreline with their children, Porthgwidden Beach is a family-friendly beauty with gentler waves and fine sand that’s great for kids to swim in. It takes an average of 2 hr 39 min to arrive from Dorset to Cornwall by driving a total distance of 240 km (149 miles) along routes A35 and A30.

North Devon for 3 days

North Devon is home to some of the most renowned beaches, including Tunnel Beach, a unique privately owned beach paradise that has been a must-see since Victorian times. One of the area’s highlights is a massive tidal pool that retains fresh seawater.

Woolacombe Beach, which stretches for 3 miles along Devon’s breathtaking North coast, is favoured by families searching for a safe beach to take their kids to, making this city a superb destination to end your 2 weeks in England trip.

Head to Saunton Sands, which offers three miles of lovely sandy shoreline. If you’re seeking a quiet and uncrowded beach, head to Saunton Sands, which offers 3 miles of shoreline.

Travelling from Cornwall to North Devon would be ideal by car as it often takes around 2 hr 3 min with an estimated distance of 156 km (87 miles) along route A30.

THINGS TO SEE AND DO IN ENGLAND

Below is a list of must-see places in England and must-do activities. I also added my favourite and most recommended tours that you can book. Most of them have flexible cancellations in case you change your mind. But if you’re travelling during peak season, grab your spot as soon as you can.

• Tower of London and Crown of Jewels – you can book a tour
• Tower Bridge and Big Ben
• Join a fun Harry Potter guided walking tour and get a ticket to Harry Potter Warner Bros Studio
• The British Museum
• Kensington Palace – you can join a sightseeing tour
• Buckingham Palace
• Book a spooky Jack the Ripper tour
• Westminster Abbey – hop on a boat cruise from Westminster to Greenwich
• The National Gallery
• London Eye – you can get a fast-track ticket to save time
• Picadilly Circus and Trafalgar Square
• Madame Tussauds – visit one of the most famous museums in London, get your entry ticket
• Windsor Castle – get your admission ticket
• The Shard – you can get a ticket to enjoy a panoramic view
• Royal Pavilion and Brighton Museum – reserve your ticket
• Brighton Fishing Museum and Marina
• Explore Brighton on a guided walking tour
• The Lanes and North Laine
• I360 Viewing Tower – get your ticket in advance
• Regency Square and the Houses around it
• Brighton Toy and Model Museum
• Exciting day trip to Seven Sisters and South Downs – see tour price
• Try zipline along the beach
• Book a Drag Queen Show on a bottomless brunch – check the price
• Day trip to Stonehenge and Bath from Brighton

Northern England

Manchester :

• Explore Manchester on a city bus – get your ticket
• Science and Industry Museum
• Coronation Street – explore with a local guide
• Manchester Cathedral
• National Football Museum – check the tour itinerary
• The Whitworth
• Book a canal cruise – check the tour price
• Castlefield Canals
• Enjoy a day trip to the North of Wales, Snowdonia, and Chester or a day trip to the Lake District and Windermere
• Sign up for a food tour or Cheese crawl

Liverpool :

• Penny Lane and Strawberry Fields
• Tate Liverpool
• World War II Museum – get your ticket
• Merseyside Maritime Museum
• Mersey River – book a cruise
• Croxteth Hall
• Enjoy a Beatles tour / Beatles Story – blue route bus tour or a private taxi tour
• Birkenhead Park
• Liverpool Football Stadium (Anfield) – join a tour
• Peaky Blinders filming locations – tour with a guide
• Book a ghosting walking tour – look at the itinerary

Sheffield :

• Peak District – you can do a Scavenger hunt
• Sheffield Botanical Gardens
• Graves Park
• Kelham Island Museum
• Abbeydale Industrial Hamlet
• Sheffield Town Hall
• Beauchief Abbey and Ancient Woodlands
• Book a walking tour with a local guide
• Civic Quarter
• Leeds Castle – you can book a day trip from London
• The Headrow
• Book a food tour – read the reviews
• The Royal Armories Museum
• Harewood House
• North Yorkshire Cruise – 1-hour cruise or a cruise with afternoon tea
• Leeds Industrial Museum
• Harrogate – there’s a food tour you can join
• The National Coal Mining Museum

Peak District

• Chatsworth House
• Peak Cavern
• Treak Cliff Cavern
• Speedwell Cavern
• Alton Towers
• Haddon Hall
• Heights of Abraham
• National Trust – Lyme
• The Pavilion Gardens
• The Roaches
• Wyming Brook Nature Reserve

Lake District

• Aira Force Waterfall
• Loughrigg Fell
• Stock Ghyll Force (waterfall)
• Cathedral Cave
• Skelwith Force (waterfall)
• Stanley Ghyll Waterfall
• National Trust – Wray Castle
• Scale Force Waterfall
• Holehird Gardens
• Moss Force Waterfall
• The World of Beatrix Potter Attraction
• National Trust – Hill Top

Yorkshire Dales/Dartmoor National Park

• Yockenthwaite Stone Circle
• Malham Cove
• Gordale Scar
• Janet’s Foss Waterfall
• Linton Falls and Linton Stepping Stones
• Kilnsey Park
• Fountains Fell
• Ribblehead Viaduct
• Scaleber Force Waterfall
• Jubilee Cave
• National Park Visitor Centre (Dartmoor)
• Bellever Tor
• Laughter Tor
• Fernworthy Stone Circle
• Bennett’s Cross
• Black-a-Tor (North Dartmoor)
• National Trust – Castle Drogo
• Ditsworthy Warren House
• Foggintor Quarry
• Corfe Castle
• Dorset AONB
• The Tank Museum
• Weymouth Beach
• Durdle Door
• National Trust – Kingston Lacy
• Russell Cotes Art Gallery & Museum
• National Trust – Brownsea Island
• Sandbanks Beach
• Highcliffe Castle
• Lulworth Castle Wareham
• Portland Bill Lighthouse
• The Blue Pool
• Abbotsbury Subtropical Gardens
• Lulworth Cove
• Borough Gardens
• Osmington White Horse
• Dancing Ledge
• Surf at St. Ives Bay
• Polperro Heritage Coast
• Hike along the South West Coast Path (630-mile
• Towan Beach
• National Trust Properties – Trelissick Garden, Godrevy, Lanhydrock House, Trerice, or the Cotehele House
• Pendennis Castle
• Eden Project
• Enys Gardens
• Lankidden Cove
• Isles of Scilly
• Kynance Cove
• Tate St Ives
• Tintagel Castle
• Eat Cornish dishes
• Mining Heritage – Geevor Tin Mine, Poldark Mine, or the Heartlands Heritage Centre

North Devon

• North Devon Coast and Saunton Sands
• National Trust Properties – Baggy Point, Watersmeet,
• Surfing or Swimming at Croyde Bay, Woolacombe Bay or Saunton Sands
• Morte Point
• Tunnels Beaches
• Ilfracombe Harbour Devon
• Heddon’s Mouth
• Valley of Rocks
• Exmoor Zoological and Conservation Centre
• Museum of Barnstaple & North Devon
• RHS Garden Rosemoor
• Walk or Cycle along Tarka Trail – 180-mile
• Boat from Appledore or Instow to Lundy Island
• Clovelly Court Gardens

MUST-TRY ENGLISH DISHES, DRINKS, AND SNACKS

England is not known for its food, but it doesn’t mean there’s nothing to try. The list below is a compilation of traditional English dishes. Today, England is a melting pot of diverse cultures. This means that you can pretty much find restaurants serving different cuisines from western, Indian, Chinese, Latin, Greek, and American just to name a few.

Make sure to try at least 3-4 dishes during your 2 weeks in English. Of course, never leave without checking a traditional English pub.

• Fish and chips (deep-fried fish and french fries)
• Roast beef and Yorkshire pudding
• Ploughman’s lunch (a selection of cheese, pickles, and bread)
• Toad in the hole (sausages baked in a batter pudding)
• Shepherd’s pie (ground lamb or beef topped with mashed potatoes)
• Steak and kidney pie
• Pork pie (a pastry filled with pork and seasonings)
• Cumberland sausage
• Bangers and mash sausages and mashed potatoes)
• Cornish pasty
• Bubble and squeak (mashed potatoes and vegetables)
• Coronation chicken (chicken salad with curry and fruit)
• Eton mess (mixture of strawberries, meringue and whipped cream)
• Trifle (layered dessert with fruit, sponge cake, custard, and cream)
• Apple crumble (a warm dessert made with cooked apples and a crumbly pastry topping)
• Sticky toffee pudding (a moist sponge cake made with dates and topped with a toffee sauce)
• Lemon Tart (a sweet pastry crust filled with a lemon custard made from eggs, sugar, lemon juice and zest)
• Pub ale/beer
• Pimm’s (gin-based liqueur)
• Hot toddy (hot drink made with whiskey, honey, lemon, and fruits)

ACCOMMODATIONS IN ENGLAND (by city)

To help you find a place to stay in each city, depending on your budget, here’s a quick list of accommodations around England.

• Affordable: Hootananny Hostel or Dover Castle Hostel or The Phoenix Hostel
• Mid-range: Central Hotel or Keystone House or Studios2Let
• Luxury: The Londoner or The Ampersand Hotel or One Hundred Shoreditch
• Affordable to Mid-range: EI8HT Brighton or Selina Brighton or The Beach Hotel
• Luxury: Drakes Hotel or The Charm Boutique Hotel & Spa or Jurys Inn Waterfront
• Affordable to Mid-range: The New Inn or The Bird in Hand Inn or St. Michaels Bistro
• Luxury: Stratton House Hotel & Spa or No131 The Promenade
• Affordable to Mid-range Hotel: Church Street or The Gardens Hotel or Yotel Deansgate
• Luxury: Stock Exchange Hotel or CitySuites Aparthotel or Hotel Gotham
• Affordable or Mid-range: The Miners Arms or The Barrel Inn or The Little Mill Inn or High Tor Hotel
• Luxury: Hollin House Hotel or The Legh Arms Prestbury or The Peacock at Barlow
• Affordable: Ambleside Central or Quaysiders Club
• Mid-range: Ambleside Townhouse or Rothay Garth
• Luxury: The Old Stamp House or Rothay Manor Hotel or Langdale Hotel & Spa

Yorkshire Dales

• Affordable: Craigsland BnB or The Buck Inn
• Mid-range: The Devonshire Grassington or Ashfield House
• Luxury: Marske Stables or The Devonshire Fell Hotel

Dartmoor National Park

• Affordable: The Rock Inn or Riverside B&B or The Cromwell Arms Inn
• Mid-range: The White Hart Hotel or Down The Garden Path or Dolphin Hotel
• Luxury: The Old Thatch or Romantic Cottage
• Affordable: Bub Lane Cottage or Greyhound Inn or The Bridge House
• Mid-range: The Grove Arms or The New Inn or The Mitre Inn
• Luxury: Derby Manor or Kingston Country Courtyard
• Affordable: The Old Inn or Legacy Hotel Victoria
• Mid-range: Park View or Fistral Beach Hotel & Spa (adults only) or The Britannia Inn
• Luxury: Primrose House St Ives or The Land’s End Hotel or Bodmin Jail Hotel
• Affordable: Wickham House Apartment or The Nook
• Mid-range: The Hoops Inn or The Imperial Hotel
• Luxury: Westeria Cottage or The Park Hotel or Broomhill Estate

SUMMARY OF 2 WEEKS IN ENGLAND

England’s villages are as lovely as they come, with stone cottages, cobblestone streets, and rooftops. No trip to England would be complete without taking in the beauty of these small towns, whether it is the charming chocolate-coloured villages of the Cotswolds, Norfolk’s serene coastal villages, or the unique villages of North Yorkshire.

This guide has everything from the museums and famous sites of London to the breathtaking Jurassic Coast in Dorset, the history of Bath, and trekking in England’s national parks. You’re sure to fall in love with the country’s lush green environment, which features picture-perfect hills.

You’ll come across the beautiful countryside from the South to the North waiting to be explored. I hope you found this compilation of 2 weeks in England itineraries helpful in planning and writing your own travel itinerary .

TO SAVE THIS ITINERARY, PIN THIS IMAGE BELOW:

The Ultimate Cheat Sheet for Your First Trip to London

Are you planning your first trip to London?  

This global city is endlessly popular with travelers from all over the world. With its famous landmarks and iconic sights, the number of things to see and do in London can easily excite and overwhelm first-time visitors.

In this post, you’ll find a cheat sheet compiled over 3 separate visits to London packed with information about how to get to London from the airport, where to stay in London, how to get around once you arrive, and best of all,  mapped-out London itinerary planning tips .

Are you ready to make your first trip to London a success? 

How to Plan a Trip to London

It can seem daunting to get started on your London trip plan. It’s a huge city with lots of iconic sights and experiences. In fact, I think it’s often underestimated by travelers who often write to tell me what a great time they had in London and that the city was such a surprise…in a good way!

So, as any good teacher will tell you, start with an outline. In this case, you want to break down each step you’ll need to do to plan a trip to London and then work on filling in all the details.

Start with deciding when you want to visit London and how many days you’ll stay. (I recommend at least 3-4 days.)

Once you know this, you can work on booking your London accommodations. (I recommend staying in a central-ish area within walking distance of a Tube station. Keep reading for more below) The further out you book your London hotel, the more available options you’ll have with competitive pricing.

ProTip: If you have flexibility, you might even look at London flights and hotels first to find the cheapest combination of dates and rates. In this way, you’re letting the deals decide when you travel versus looking for a deal on the dates you need/want to travel.

Once you’ve got the major logistics set, it’s time to work on your London itinerary. (I’ve got specific itinerary ideas below so keep reading!)

At this point in your planning a trip to London, you’ll want to make a list of the London sights and attractions that are your must sees and dos. Then, using the maps below (or Google Maps), start grouping them by area.

One really important thing to know as you plan your London trip is that the city is huge. The distances between places can be far, and with limited days, you don’t want to backtrack or plan activities on opposite ends of the city on the same day.

From here, figure out what can be booked ahead…and actually book it ahead! London is a popular destination. It’s normal for there to be lines at top sights and restaurants that are completely booked.

You can use sightseeing passes like The London Pass (my complete review) to pre-plan and save money. Or you can book individual tickets through a platform like Get Your Guide .

Once you know where you’re staying and what you’ll be doing each day, you can round out your London trip planning by looking at the Tube Map to orient yourself and decide how you’ll get from the airport to the city center. (More tips on this below!)

What to See and Do on Your First Trip to London

This London trip planner is set up in different sections to help you plan a trip to London from start to finish. The first part helps you get ideas about how to plan your days in London with landmarks, attractions, museums, markets, and activities in a logistically sensible way.

You want to maximize your time in London without backtracking or zigzagging around the city. These ideas can also help you piece together a complete day because not all of them require a full day.

You also note that I’ve included the Tube stops for individual attractions. This is to help you in case you visit these places outside of the order I’ve suggested in the Google Map for each itinerary idea.

After these itinerary ideas for planning your trip to London, you’ll find tips and helpful information so you can navigate the city confidently.

Are you ready to plan your trip to London?

London Itinerary Planning Idea #1 – History Buffs and Foodies

Tower of London – Tower Hill Tube Stop – Circle and District Lines

The  Tower of London  with its crown jewels is an absolute must with its thick, ominous walls, dark past, resident black ravens, and informative Beefeaters. The Tower and the nearby Tower Bridge sit stalwartly as a link to the past when Kings and Queens sent prisoners to “think” about their choices and to wait for the inevitable… execution.

The Tower of London was the inhospitable home to infamous gangsters, spies, Dukes, Bishops, Princes, and even Queens!

Undoubtedly the most famous Queen of them all was the ill-fated Anne Boleyn. The Tower of London is where Henry the VIII’s executioner beheaded her on charges of adultery and conspiracy, however, Henry actually blamed her for not producing a male heir.

Today, visiting the Tower of London is like stepping back in time. The daily traditions involving this historic castle have continued for hundreds of years. The resident Beefeaters live at the Tower of London and maintain the rituals and routines of the past. But they also offer free tours (once inside) and comically share their vast Tower of London knowledge.

These tours begin every 30 minutes starting at 10:00 a.m. and finishing with the last tour at 2:30 p.m.

Pro Tip:  Arrive in the morning when the Tower first opens. It becomes quite crowded later in the day. Use your  London Pass  to get Fast Track Entry and bundled savings when compared to buying attraction tickets individually.

Tower Bridge & Borough Market – London Bridge Tube Stop – Northern and Jubilee Lines

After a morning at the Tower of London, time your escape for lunch at  Borough Market . It’ll be easiest to walk from the Tower of London. Walk across Tower Bridge instead of London Bridge as shown on the map above. The walk is a bit longer than crossing London Bridge, but historic Tower Bridge is a sight in its own right.

You can tour the Victorian-era engine rooms, as well as climb to the bridge’s upper walkways for gorgeous views over London and the River Thames. Get your Tower Bridge ticket in advance or use The London Pass to visit the bridge.

You can also cross the River Thames with a river bus using your Tube Oyster Card (more on these below) from Tower Pier to London Bridge City Pier.

Once at Borough Market, the market lanes are lined with food and grocers selling every imaginable food item. It’s a great place to sample a variety of foods from all types of global cuisines. Not to mention, no London trip is complete without taking advantage of the city’s amazing international food scene!

From famous falafel to perfectly spiced Indian food, huge skillets of paella, and savory British pies from Pieminster, you’ll be thankful to visit with an empty stomach on your first trip to London and every time you return like I do!

Restaurants and cafes fill the upstairs level and the surrounding streets (in case you’d prefer to sit rather than sample and roam) making this Southwark neighborhood a foodie’s delight.

ProTip: From Borough Market, you’re just a 5-minute walk to The Shard , London’s tallest glass skyscraper to see the highest views over the city. If you have it, you can use your London Pass for access. Be sure to follow the pass instructions to pre-reserve a time.

London Itinerary Planning Idea #2 – Royalty and High Tea

Westminster Abbey – Westminster Tube Stop – Jubilee Line

Coming out of Westminster Station, you’ll immediately be in the shadow of Big Ben and London’s iconic Parliament Building. You can walk back onto the Westminster Bridge to capture fuller photos of these London landmarks. If you’re lucky, you just might get a classic shot with a red doubledecker bus!

Continue on to  Westminster Abbey , just a couple of minutes walking from Big Ben. Westminster Abbey is open to visitors Monday-Saturday from 9:30 a.m until 3:30 p.m. The Abbey is closed on Sundays so keep this in mind when planning your London trip.

Use your  London Pass  to gain access to Westminster. Once inside, admire the architecture and the Abbey’s gorgeous choir room. Westminster is also the final resting place of numerous kings, queens, and dignitaries. You can see the monuments in their honor, as well as learn about their place in history.

If you’re a fan of the Royals, you’ll be visiting the spot where Kate and William were married.

Pro Tip:  If you want to take a ride on the London Eye , it can be included with the stops you make in and around Big Ben because it’s just a short walk over the bridge you see in the photo below. Avoid the lines by choosing the fast-track ticket option. It’s also quite popular to depart from the Westminster Pier for a cruise along the River Thames to take in the sights of London from the water.

History buffs won’t want to miss the Churchill War Rooms. They’re not far from Westminster Abbey, along the edge of St. James’s Park. These rooms served as the secret headquarters for Churchill during WW2. The rooms have been preserved just as they were during the war and give a fascinating look at how Churchill operated and made decisions during this dark time in history.

If your trip to London is 3 days or less and it’s your first visit, this WW2 museum may not be a top priority. But if you or a travel companion is interested in visiting WW2 sights and museums in Europe, The Churchill War Rooms are a great way to divert from the typical first time in London sights.

Buckingham Palace-Green Park Tube Stop-Jubilee, Victoria, & Piccadilly Lines

Next, make your way to  Buckingham Palace  where the  Changing of the Guards  happens.

The ceremony is all pomp and fanfare. The King’s Guard outside the castle has been on watch for hours and the new guard comes to take over in grand style! A marching brigade of guards along with a mounted cavalry and a marching band head up The Mall and through the palace gates.

This ceremony draws a crowd so it’s best to arrive ahead of time so that you can get yourself in a position to see the fanfare. I’ve watched from both the gates of Buckingham Palace and the Queen Victoria Monument directly opposite the palace gates.

You’ll have to choose the location you want because it’s typically too crowded to move from place to place. To get a spot along the fence at Buckingham Palace, be prepared to arrive up to an hour early and wait.

If this is the case, you also may need to reverse the order and visit Westminster Abbey after so that you can stake out your Changing of the Guard spot in the morning.

Pro Tip:  Check the  Changing of the Guard schedule  before you go to make sure the ceremony is planned for the day you intend to visit.

Hyde Park – Hyde Park Corner Tube Stop – Piccadilly Line

When the ceremony is finished, keep those royal juices flowing for a stroll around  Hyde Park . It’s one of the largest parks in London, as well as one of the Royal Parks. Enjoy its monuments, bridges, fountains, gardens, and lake, including the Princess Diana Memorial Fountain.

Finish up with a classic afternoon tea experience at  The Dorchester Hotel .

No doubt, it’s a luxurious splurge, but after having experienced life as a royal, it’s the perfect way to properly finish the experience. From finger sandwiches, scones with clotted cream, sweets, and of course, tea, you’ll have had a quintessential London outing.

Alternatively, if you plan afternoon tea for another day, you might want to visit London’s Natural History Museum or Kensington Palace on the other end of Hyde Park.

The latter has been a royal residence for hundreds of years and was where Princess Diana lived with Princes William and Harry. Today, you can tour the apartments and staterooms and see the sunken gardens where there is a statue of Princess Diana commemorating the 20th anniversary of her death.

While the Natural History Museum displays animal specimens, dinosaurs, and exhibitions about the history of the natural world and the people who evolved in it.

If you intend to walk into Hyde Park and casually make your way towards Kensington Palace or the Natural History Museum, the walk will be broken up by the time spent in the park.

Otherwise, if your aim is to get to either of these sights without a long walk, use the London underground. The Queensway stop along the Central line is the closest to Kensington Palace and the South Kensington stop along the Circle and District lines is near to the Natural History Museum.

London Itinerary Planning Idea #3 – Architecture, Theatre, & Art

St. Paul’s Cathedral – St. Paul’s Tube Stop – Central Line

Start off at  St. Paul’s Cathedral  to admire this Anglican Church’s architecture. You can explore the crypt or head in the opposite direction and climb the dome’s 528 steps for spectacular panoramic London views.

If you have it, entry is included with your London Pass .

Take your time crossing the pedestrian-only Millennium Bridge on your way to the Tate Modern and Shakespeare’s Globe Theatre. This is a great spot to watch boat traffic along the River Thames.

Tate Modern & The Globe Theatre-Blackfriars Tube Stop-Circle & District Lines

These 2 London attractions are just next to one another.

The  Tate Modern  has a vast permanent collection of modern art by the likes of Henri Matisse and Jackson Pollock, as well as temporary exhibitions. There are beautiful views looking back on St. Paul’s Cathedral and the River Thames, as well.

It’s free to enter the museum and there’s no need to book ahead, unless there is a specific exhibit you’d like to see that requires a reserved space.

The nearby  Globe Theatre  is a replica of Shakespeare’s original which burned in a fire many years ago after the thatched roof was ignited during a production of Henry VIII.

For your first trip to London, you’ll want to use your  London Pass  to tour the theater during the day and hear about its historic past. The Globe also has evening performances during the spring, summer, and fall seasons. The ambiance of the open-air theater makes for a fantastic night out!

Pro Tip:  Check times to coordinate visits to both the Tate Modern and The Globe in a way that lets you see one after the other. The Globe performance tickets sell out so purchase them in advance, especially if you want to see a play on a specific date.

London Itinerary Planning Idea #4 – Artifacts, Landmarks, and Shopping

The British Museum – Tottenham Court Tube Stop – Central & Northern Lines

No trip to London is complete without a stop at The   British Museum . The art and artifacts on display are open free to the public beginning at 10:00 a.m. each day. Highlights include the Rosetta Stone, sculptures from the Parthenon, and a vast Egyptian collection including mummies.

It’s worth checking for any special, limited-time exhibits during your stay. If there’s one you’d like to see, it’s worth buying tickets online or at the museum when you first arrive.

After the museum, spend the afternoon strolling through  Covent Garden  or head over to  Soho  and  Oxford Street  for a shopper’s paradise. Covent Garden is in London’s West End, home to theaters, restaurants, and shops. You’re sure to find anything you’d want to buy from the numerous chain stores, boutiques, and markets.

Pro Tip:  There are many classic London pubs in these neighborhoods. If you haven’t had a plate of fish and chips yet, now’s the time. You can also join a historical pub walking tour to visit some of London’s most iconic pubs.

Leicester Square – Leicester Square Tube Stop – Piccadilly & Northern Lines

Make your way to  Leicester Square  and the heart of London’s Theatre District. It’s super touristy here. Think Times Square-esque…a place where you take a few photos before moving on.

But if you plan to see a musical or a play later (and you certainly should!),  get your discounted tickets at the TKTS booth right in the square for performances that day or night.

There’s crossover between shows in London and New York’s Broadway district. Sometimes, you can even catch a performance in London before it heads to New York City.

Trafalgar Square – Charing Cross Tube Stop – Bakerloo & Northern Lines

Finish your walk at  Trafalgar Square . This iconic London crossroads has monuments, historic buildings, museums, and street performers. It’s an absolute beehive of activity and perfect for taking more classic London photos complete with red double-decker buses passing by on the streets in and around the square.

With any luck, you’ll have time to check out the  National Gallery  right in Trafalgar Square which houses famous paintings by the likes of Vermeer, Monet, Rembrandt, Cezanne, and Leonardo Da Vinci.

Best of all, it’s free to visit, and you can use your  London Pass  Hop On Hop Off double-decker bus ticket to reposition yourself closer to your hotel when you’re done.

London Itinerary Planning Idea #5 – Harry Potter Fans

Harry Potter Studio Tour Meeting Point – Victoria Station – Circle, District & Victoria Lines

Are you traveling with a wannabe wizard dying for a Hogwarts adventure?

Plan a visit to the  Harry Potter and Warner Brothers Studio . Buses leave from Central London and travel to the magical sets of the famed movie and book series. The closest tube stop to the meeting point is Victoria Station. From there, it’s just a few minutes on foot.

You’ll have 4 hours to see places like the Great Hall, Dumbledore’s Office, Diagon Alley, and more! Plus, get to see some of the most famous props and the costumes worn by Harry, Ron, and Hermione.

If you’ve wanted to visit Platform 9 ¾, ride the Hogwarts Express, and attempt to ride a broomstick, then you definitely don’t want to miss escaping the world of Muggles for just a bit on your visit to London!

ProTip: If you want to sprinkle some Harry Potter into your London trip but don’t want to commit a full day to the experience, this Harry Potter Guided Walking Tour is a popular alternative.

Out-of-Town Must-Sees on your First Trip to London

From London, many parts of Britain and the U.K. are easily reachable by train. This makes it possible to visit a couple of popular sites with even just a half day’s worth of time.

Trains run from London to both  Windsor Castle  and  Hampton Court Palace . From their respective train stations, it’s just a few minutes on foot to reach the entry points.

The exquisite staterooms at Windsor Castle are open to the public when the King is not in residence. These rooms are some of the most spectacular castle rooms you’ll see anywhere in the world.

St. George’s Chapel, within the grounds of Windsor Castle, is the final resting spot of Henry VIII and several other Kings and Queens. It’s also where Meghan and Harry were married and the final resting place of Queen Elizabeth II.

Hampton Court Palace is full of Tudor history, as it was a regular stop for Henry VIII and his royal court. The palace creates a historical experience by revealing the inner workings of how the palace operated in its heyday. It’s undoubtedly one of the most interesting and well-preserved looks at Tudor history, as well as what life was like during this period.

Look out for King Henry VIII himself, as visitors can watch the King interact with Anne Boleyn or flirt with his soon-to-be next wife, Jane Seymour. Leave some time for the palace’s gardens and maze.

Pro Tip:  Windsor Castle and Hampton Court Palace are both included with the  London Pass . Get Fast Track Entry at Hampton Court to maximize your time and avoid any entry line.

If you have extra days in your itinerary, consider a London day trip to:

• Windsor Castle, Stonehenge, and Bath
• The Cotswolds
• Highclere Castle (Downton Abbey) & the Filming Locations

If you’re planning a trip to England, rent a car and drive into the English countryside when your time in London is done. I’ve done this to spend time exploring places like Stratford-Upon-Avon , the Cotswolds villages , and Warwick Castle .

It’s a perfect way to add on to an England itinerary and explore more of what the country has to offer beyond London.

Best Area to Stay in London

Where to stay in London is one of the most frequently asked questions for anyone planning a trip. It’s understandable. You want to be somewhere conveniently located, safe, and within your travel budget.

London’s neighborhoods and districts each have their own unique charm and flavor. And while some might say you should absolutely stay in the heart of the most touristy areas of the city, I think the most important thing when choosing where to stay in London is to  stay somewhere with convenient access to the Tube. 

You shouldn’t be hesitant to book a hotel or rental accommodation that’s a few Tube stops away from popular attractions. You can truly get nearly anywhere in London very quickly by using the underground train system.

That being said, you don’t want to stay too far from the heart of London, either. The city is big and the Tube rides from London’s outer neighborhoods can take upwards of an hour back to the center.

Ideally, you want to find a London hotel that matches your travel budget, close to a Tube station, in a relatively center-ish location. Example neighborhoods include Seven Dials, Covent Garden, Westminster, Soho, and near Southwark along the south bank.

Below, I’ve shared a couple of hotels where I’ve stayed. They’re in different budget categories and neighborhoods, and they have convenient Tube access.

I’ve had excellent hotel points and paid stays at several London hotels including the ones listed below.

Radisson Blu Edwardian Mercer Street Hotel  – The hotel is located in the Seven Dials neighborhood near Covent Garden, the West End’s Theatre district, pubs, and my favorite Indian restaurant, Dishoom. Rooms are a classic modern boutique style for which Radisson Blu hotels are known.

Holiday Inn Express London-Southwark  – Just a 10-minute walk to Borough Market, the Tate Modern, or the Globe Theatre, with a Tube station nearby. This hotel is on the south bank of the city not far from the Southwark Tube station.

London Rental Accommodations

During my travels, I’ve also opted for apartment and home rentals. You feel more like a local and oftentimes can save money because you’re able to prepare your own breakfast or share the overall cost with family members or friends. Not to mention, you can find truly unique places to stay with awesome views or even discover a new neighborhood!

London is the perfect destination to consider a rental accommodation over a hotel because hotels aren’t cheap(!) and London is well-connected with its underground trains.

My go-to place to search for rental accommodations is Plum Guide . They vet the properties on their site using “Home Critics” and only select the best properties in a variety of price brackets. Plum Guide even offers phone support 24/7 should you need any help or have questions.

How Many Days to Spend in London

As with most places, you can spend an extended period of time and still not see and do everything a fantastic city like London has to offer.

If it’s your first time in London, you likely will focus on the most popular attractions and experiences that interest you. For this, you’ll need 3-4 days to explore and make use of the London itinerary ideas in this guide.

With 4+ days in London, you can also use a day to visit a popular sight just outside of London or even  get off the beaten path .

London is a great city to explore. It’s also the perfect jumping-off point for future trips to Europe. It’s not complicated to add a couple of days in London as a stopover before continuing on to another destination in Europe.

Arrival into London

The  Heathrow Express  is a quick and efficient way to get into the city from London Heathrow Airport. The train leaves every 15 minutes and arrives in just about the same time to Paddington Station.

You can book your tickets online or using the Heathrow Express App. Not only will this save you any hassle at the airport, but you’ll also save money. Heathrow Express prices are lower the further you book in advance.

Gatwick Airport also has an  express train  which arrives at Victoria Station. Trains run every 15 minutes and take a half-hour to reach London.

Similarly, the express train from Gatwick offers considerable discounts for booking online and ahead of time.

The airports also have commuter trains, buses, and taxis to get you into London. Except for the taxis, these options are less expensive than the express trains mentioned above but do take more time.

You can check prices and schedules for  Southern Railways  from Gatwick to compare.

In addition, from London Heathrow, you can take the Tube. Trains along the Picadilly and Elizabeth lines connect terminals 2, 3, 4, and 5. The ride takes between 45-50 minutes to reach central London but is less expensive than the Heathrow Express.

From Paddington and Victoria Stations in London, you’ll have access to the  London Tube  with lines spreading across the city, as well as a taxi queue at ground level. Most taxis take credit cards but be aware of the occasional cash-only sign in a taxi’s window.

Pro Tip:  My recommendation is to use an express train or the Tube (from/to Heathrow), for a quick and easy trip to London’s city center or even directly to your hotel. Avoid London traffic and expensive taxi rides.

If you’d prefer to arrange transportation and/or avoid taking the trains, consider booking a car with Welcome Pickups  to transfer to the city. Although I’ve only used the trains to get from Heathrow to London, I’ve used Welcome Pickups in several other European cities and always had a great experience.

This will be a much more affordable option compared to a London taxi. The price will be a flat rate, as opposed to paying based on the taxi’s metered fare which can get quite high with even the smallest amount of traffic

How to get around London

London is very pedestrian-friendly and you’re bound to do a good amount of walking during your London trip. Remember, cars are on the opposite side of the road compared to the U.S., so you need to LOOK RIGHT when crossing the road. When in doubt, just look both ways before crossing.

Along the Thames, the riverwalk is a clear path connected with several bridges to help you cross to the other side as frequently as you need.

In addition, London’s Tube (subway) is reliable, easy to navigate, and stretches across the city. The announcements are clear and the lines are identified with colors and names, like Central, District, and Piccadilly. Given how big London is, you’ll need to rely on public transportation to maximize the time you have rather than always walking long distances.

As with getting to London from the airport, taxis are expensive in London and get even pricier when traffic is heavy. It’s best to go underground to save time, money, and patience.

Visitors staying for a few days can get an Oyster Card for easy use and refills in the Tube. Your Oyster Card is good for your first trip to London and every return trip thereafter!

London Pass  purchases come with the option to add a visitor’s Oyster Card. I would skip this option because the card takes several weeks to be physically mailed to you. You can also save more money by simply using a regular Oyster Card or the Tube’s contactless payment system because it will cap how much you’ll pay each day automatically.

Use a contactless credit card to pay to enter the Tube, as well as a mobile device like a smartphone with Apple Pay, Google Pay, or Samsung Pay. Just be sure you’re using a card with no foreign transaction fees.

A few things to keep in mind when paying to access the Tube.

• Use the same card or device when you touch in and out at the yellow card readers. The London Tube caps how much you’ll pay. So, you can ride as much as you want in a day or a week and you’ll never pay more than the capped price.
• If you don’t use the same card or device, the Tube card readers won’t be able to accurately cap the amount you pay.
• If you’re using a device like a smartphone, be sure you have enough battery power. You need to touch in and out of the Tube. You also need to use your phone all day otherwise the system can’t cap the amount you pay.
• You can pay for another person if you are traveling together. (They will need to touch out of the Tube and can’t do it without your card or device.) You’ll need to pay for yourself with a separate card or device.

London Tips for Your First Trip

As you plan things to do in London and where to stay in London, also take into consideration the tips below. They’ve come from 3 separate trips to London and a lot of travel experience overall.

The best time to visit London is during spring and fall.

Visiting London in the shoulder/winter season months, April-June and September-November, are the perfect combination of moderate to cool temperatures and fewer visitors. January to March can also be a good time to visit if you’re not bothered by colder temperatures and prefer to visit during the least busy time of year.

Summer can be very busy, making the next London travel tip even that much more important.

Book as many things as possible in advance.

Not only will things like the London Pass or advance fast-track tickets help you save time and money, but it’ll eliminate indecisiveness about what to do while you’re in London and who to trust when you eventually buy the tickets, tours, and passes you want.

Use a credit card with no foreign transaction fees.

London isn’t a budget destination. The last thing you want to add to the currency exchange are fees from your credit card once you get your bill back home.

Credit cards are widely accepted throughout London and also remove the necessity to convert and carry large amounts of dollars to British pounds.

ProTip: When paying by credit card or using your debit card to withdraw money at an ATM, always pay in the local currency (Pounds) and/or decline the currency conversion. This is a sneaky way to convert your money at a less-than-desirable rate.

Wear comfortable walking shoes.

I know this seems obvious but it truly can’t be understated. As someone who lives in New York City, I can always recognize a visitor who’s regretting his/her shoe choice.

These are the most comfortable shoes I’ve ever worn. I wear them walking around New York City and they’re a staple I pack for nearly every trip I take. You can walk miles without any irritation or blisters.

Check for service charges.

Tipping isn’t obligatory in London. In fact, service charges are often added to bills at restaurants and pubs. That being said, if you’re happy with your service, you always leave a small amount as a gesture of appreciation.

Pack the right electrical converters.

Most commonly, you’ll need a Type G converter to plug into the outlets throughout the U.K. I’ve encountered one place where this wasn’t the case. So, it’s smart to also have a universal adapter with USB ports, too.

London Trip Planner FAQs

How do i start planning a trip to london.

To plan a trip to London, first, decide how many days you’ll spend in the city. Then, book your hotel. You’ll find more options and competitive pricing the further in advance you book. After this, plan your London itinerary. Make a list of the sights and activities you want to see and do. Then, group them by area to logically plan what to do without backtracking. Be sure to book ahead as many things as possible to save time and to ensure you can visit places on the days that make sense for your London itinerary.

How many days should I plan for London?

As you plan a trip to London, you’ll need at least 3-4 days to comfortably see the city’s top sights and attractions. London is a very large city with an endless number of things to see and do. You can easily plan a trip to London for a week and have plenty to fill your itinerary.

What time of year is best to go to London?

The absolute best months for a perfect combination of weather and number of visitors is from April to June and September through November. January to March can also be a good time to visit London because fewer people are visiting during this time. Summers come with big crowds and long lines.

What is the best area to stay in London?

The best area to stay in London is in the heart of the city, especially if you’re visiting London for the first time, and within walking distance of a Tube station. These include neighborhoods like Seven Dials, Covent Garden, Westminster, Soho, and along the south bank near the Southwark area.

Where should I go on my first trip to London?

For your first London trip, plan to see the Tower of London, Tower Bridge, the British Museum, Covent Garden, Westminster Abbey, St. Paul’s Cathedral, Buckingham Palace, and the iconic view of Big Ben and Parliament from Westminster Bridge. You should also plan to have afternoon tea, eat at Borough Market, go to a play or musical, and glimpse London from above at the London Eye or the Shard.

First Trip to London – Bottom Line

You have chosen a fantastic city to visit, full of important landmarks, historic sights, good food, and fun experiences. With some advance planning, you’ll arrive in London prepared with your itinerary and know-how to navigate the city confidently for an unforgettable trip.

So, what questions do you have about your first trip to London or about planning a London itinerary?

Like this post? Please share it on social media using the share buttons below!

Related Posts

Why You Should Drive the Icefields Parkway + Trip Planning Tips

3 Reasons to Visit Banff National Park Immediately

76 thoughts on “the ultimate cheat sheet for your first trip to london”.

I have been to London several times, but I found your guide and itineraries very helpful!

I’m so glad, Chrysoula! Thanks for reading. 🙂

Such a great guide! I’ve been to nearly 50 countries and still not the UK, so I’ll have to remember to come back to this article when I finally make it to London 🙂

Thanks, Tamara! 50 countries is quite an accomplishment! Awesome. Glad the guide will be useful when you make it to London. 🙂

Somehow I wish I’ve read this post before my first trip to London. Then I wouldn’t have skipped many experiences listed here) Thank you for putting this up! I’ve pinned it as well (maybe I’ll visit London again, then I’ll need it for sure)

Thanks for reading and sharing on Pinterest, Natalia. 🙂 Here’s to hoping you make it back to London soon!

Love the Pro Tops plus how you broke each day down into categories. What a great way to see London! I also like how you included things to see if it is your first time there. Going anywhere for the first time can be so overwhelming!

Especially in a big place like London, Bryanna. It’s nice to break it up and make the most of your time.

You made me want to visit London again! Love the way you divided the itinerary with themes and suggestions for good food. London is such a huge city and planning a trip there for the first time can be overwhelming, you just make it so easy! Cheers,

Thanks, Natalie! Sometimes, it’s just easier to work on trip planning in small chunks. 😉

I’ve been to London a few times, but I’ve never made it to the Windsor Castle or the Hampton Court Palace. There is just so much to do in the city and its surroundings, but you’ve highlighted the must-sees in a very comprehensive and informative post. I’d love to go back and take more advantage of the free museums, especially the National Gallery!

Next trip, Erika, take some time for Windsor Castle and/or Hampton Court Palace. They’re well worth your time. 🙂

Wish I had your cheat-sheet on m first trip to London! You certainly covered all the hot spots and then some. I can’t wait to go back and hit the places I missed.

Thanks, Sue. A return trip to London is always a good idea. 🙂

Loved your tips! I’ve pinned and will reference during my London trip planning. Can you share a bit more about the oyster card?

Thanks, Amanda! I’m so glad the post is helpful for planning your London trip. The oyster card is a plastic card you can use for quick and easy entry to the London’s metro, buses, and many commuter trains. The card is 5 pounds to buy, after which you load some money onto it. The fare you’ll pay for a metro ride with the oyster card will be cheaper than if you had simply purchased a single ticket for the ride. The Oyster card also caps off what you’d pay in a day making sure you never pay more than had you bought a day pass travel card. Hope that helps! 🙂

I love the addition of the pro tips, especially times of day best to visit. I do love London, but timed a few things wrong, ending up in bigger crowds than I like.

Thanks, Rhonda. I certainly know that feeling of being in a crowd and wanting to be anyplace but there! Glad the pro tips will help for your next London trip. 🙂

Hi Jackie! Any tips for going to London with a toddler? Going to London this Wednesday and I’m going to use your cheat sheet! Thanks!

Hi Jen! So exciting to hear about your trip. 🙂 I’d definitely do the London Eye, but book tickets ahead of time online to skip the line. The Changing of the Guard with its parade, music, and horses are also toddler-friendly. He’ll get in free to the London underground, but if you don’t want to do that, go for the Hop on Hop off Bus Tour. The pirate-themed Princess Diana Playground in Hyde Park is also supposed to be a big hit. Not sure if he’s too young, but the I’d also look at the Natural History Museum, the National Maritime and/or Transport Museum, and maybe a show like Lion King. If that show is too long, how about The Gruffalo? It’s based on the kids book and is less than an hour long. Let me know if you have any more questions and have a great trip!! 🙂

Awesome, thank you for this! I printed out your cheat sheet & 8′ using it for our guide! Thanks!

Great! Hope you have a fantastic trip, Jen!

I’m actually from London, yes all these places are great, but you haven’t mentioned how expensive they can be. Most museums and art galleries are free and fantastic but eating at fancy hotels is only for the rich! Try to go to restaurants and pubs that are not in the tourist areas and you’ll be much better value for your money. As for traditional fish and chips, there is a great place in Waterloo road called Superfish. It’s the best around and very reasonable. Lots of London Taxi drivers eat there, so you know it’s good!

Hi, Joanne and thanks for the tip about Superfish! It’s so great to get that from a local. Totally agreed about eating in hotels, too expensive. I only splurged on the Dorchester Tea because we wanted to have a fancy afternoon. Thanks again for reading. 🙂

Hi, thank you for your tips. We’re going to London ne te may, my husband and I. Do you recommend Stonehenge ?

Hi Helene, Thanks for reading and commenting. You know, as many times as I have been to London, I have not made it to Stonehenge. To help you, I’m linking to another blog post all about visiting Stonehenge written by a blogger friend of mine. She’s got some great tips. Hope that helps! 🙂

There are some great tips here. I’m planning a trip to London during the high season with a variety of ages from grandmother, 4x 30 year olds, 4 kids between the ages of 8-3, and 2 newborns. Aiaiai. Just trying to get a place to eat together will be challenging. I loved your tips about the Oyster card, and pre-booking tickets, It saves lots of time to book in advance so that you are not waiting in line for tickets, and then waiting in another line for entry. Depending on how early you book it also puts that block of tickets on separate credit card bill instead of all at once. Just a tip from how I travel with all the children and trying to be budget concsious, I usually stop in a local grocery store and grab the 3 (pound, I don’t have the symbol on my keyboard) meal deal, Its filling and usually healthy. If you have any more kid friendly tips I’d love to hear them. Thanks for the guide, I found you on Pintrest, and will make sure to repin.

Thanks for reading, Erin, and for repinning on Pinterest. I appreciate it. 🙂 Sounds like your trip is set to make some amazing multi-generational memories. Thanks for sharing your food tip. London has great parks to make use of when the kids need a break. Hyde Park has paddle boats for rent and a great playground and fountain. St. James Park also has a popular playground. Enjoy your trip!

Do you have more ideas? We will be in London for 10 days. We will do all you mention but we need more?

Hi June, Thanks so much for reading and so exciting about your upcoming trip to London! 🙂 A couple other sites/places I’d recommend is Kensington Palace and if you’re at all a history buff, the Churchill War Rooms. If you’re doing all of that plus these last 2, check out the London Pass to save some money. Also, check out Free Tours by Foot and Sandeman’s free walking tours. If you’re interested in street art and/or learning more about London’s ethnic food scene check out a tour in the Shoreditch neighborhood. With 10 days, you can also plan day trips out of the city if you want. The Cotswolds Warwick Castle , and/or Stratford upon Avon are just a couple of hours drive, as are Stonehenge and Bath. Even Paris is a doable day trip with the Chunnel train taking just 2ish hours. Good luck and enjoy your trip!

Thanks for the tip about the London Pass! We went last year and no one told us about it, and we are going back in October and still want to do many of the activities included in the pass. Sounds like a great value!

Fantastic, Dana. I hope your trip is fantastic and enjoy the London Pass! Thanks so much for reading. 🙂

The best North Indian food is in southall (West London), trains run from Paddington. Brilliant Restaurant highly recommended..

Thanks Preetvan for the tip! 🙂

It’s ravens that you find at the Tower of London, not crows!

Thanks for that! I have no bird ID skills! 🙂

Thanks for your post; definitely adding it to my Pinterest board. I’m heading there for Spring Break with my husband and three teenage girls. We have eight days (flying into Gatwick and out of Paris-CDG). How do you suggest we split the days between London and Paris? And what would your top recommendations be?

Thanks for reading, Sheath. So exciting about your upcoming family trip to London and Paris. Both cities have so much to see and do, it all depends on your interests. You can easily split your time in half, although the Francophile in me says to give yourself an extra day in Paris. Not sure if you’re into theatre, but a night out to see a show in London’s West End is unforgettable. Tower of London, Shakespeares Globe, Borough Market, high tea are all at the top of my London first time list. For Paris, visit the top of Notre Dame in the morning, Arc de Triomphe at dusk, Sainte-Chappelle, Musee de l’Orangerie, and wander through 4th, 5th, and 6th arrondissements for tucked away shops and cafes as a start to your Paris visit. Hope that helps and have soo much fun! 🙂

Thank you for this cheat sheet. Great tips and ideas. My best friend and I are traveling to Europe for our 40th birthdays in March. We are spending about 2 1/2 days in London. It seems you were recommended traveling by way of the tube for most everything. I had been looking at the Hop On and Off Bus before reading your cheat sheet. Would you recommend skipping the bus and just using the tube?

Hi Heather, Thanks for reading. London is such a great city for a friends birthday trip! I would still recommend the Tube. The traffic in London can be horrible and Hop on Hop off buses can get stuck in it with the rest of the vehicles. With 2 1/2 days, getting underground will help you maximize your time getting from place to place. Enjoy your trip! -Jackie

Do you have any recommendations for visiting in December (just prior to Christmastime)? My family and I will be arriving on a Monday and departing on Thursday (for Germany), flying in and out of Stansted. It will be myself, my husband, and our 2 kids, ages 20 and (will turn while we’re in London) 17 year old (boy and girl). My husband is normally into things like the museums, but he’s the type that would need several days in any one museum (he literally reads each and every plaque, and doesn’t miss a display, LOL). So, because we’re limited on time, we’ll probably skip museums until another time. My husband and I are doing Harry Potter/WB Studios on Tuesday (I’m a big fan, kids not so much) and we’re letting them go off on their own. Will definitely be getting Oyster Cards.

Any other recommendations, especially since will will be cold weather? Thanks!

Thanks for reading, Cammi. I’d definitely try and see a show, be it one in the west end or a special Christmas themed show or concert. I’d also like to see the seasonal attractions like the winter wonderland in Hyde Park and all the lights around the city. I’m a cold weather gal so I love to get outside. But just in case of super cold weather, I’d have 1 museum in mind just as a back up if you need to warm up. Not sure if your hubby has seen the Churchill War rooms not far from Westminster, but I highly recommend. Enjoy your trip!

My husband and I leave for our first ever trip abroad, London, in less than a week! The ironic and very strange thing is that as soon as I read the title of our article was that the authors last name is Sills. That is MY maiden name and some of my father’s family still lives in England! Dad himself, Charles Sills, was actually born in London! We will be visiting some Sills relatives in Suffolk on our trip!

Anyway, thanks for the great articles!

Sincerely, Elizabeth (Sills) Hurd

Hi Elizabeth, Thanks for reading and omg! My maiden name is Sills as well! I have done a ton of family research but always run into a dead end trying to figure out more about the George Sills who came over from England to the U.S. back in the 1800s. That’s so amazing you’ll be combining your tip with some ancestry travel. I hope you have a great trip and enjoy meeting your relatives! Thanks again for reading the blog. 🙂 Jackie

Nice tips overall. Anyway, thanks for the great articles!

Thanks for reading, Brandy. 🙂

I must say this is an ultimate post for travelers who are looking for trip to London at affordable cost. You have covered everything in your post such as best places to stay, which is really helpful.

Thanks for reading, Sandeep. Happy travels to London!

Your blog is amazing – thanks for all the incredible ideas. We are considering going to London for Spring Break (March 8-17, 2019). Would you recommend going at his time ….will the weather be agreeable? Thanks, Stacey

Thanks for reading, Stacey, and for your kind words. So, it’ll likely still be chilly, but I’d say yes, go! Take this with the knowledge that I live in NYC and walk around in all kinds of weather and that I love visiting Europe in the off-season. I’d rather have cooler temps and fewer crowds. Plus, with London’s Underground/Subway, you can so easily pop underground and get around if you needed to escape the weather for a bit. Not to mention with delicious tea, scones, English pies, and Indian food, there’s plenty to warm you up! 🙂 Thanks again for reading.

very informative blog love to read it. i got so many new ideas about London. Thanks for sharing and it will help me during my visit to London. [LINK EDITED OUT]

Thanks for reading, Mickey. Enjoy London. 🙂

Love this guide and the one for Portugal also. Now if I could print it and store it in my travel file folder for easier access when I go to London. Thanks for writing these detailed trip reports – they are extremely helpful

Thanks do much for reading, Jane. You can download the London cheat sheet to help with your travels. 🙂

Going to the Harry Potter Studios by bus from Central London is the silliest thing to do. It takes too long AND you can only stay at the studios until the time your bus would take you back (about 4 hours) – not enough time for a true Harry Potter fan. It is fastest and easiest to go by train from Euston Station to Watford Junction (Oyster can be used) and takes about 30minutes. The studio has buses at Watford Junction to take you there – it takes just about 10 minutes. We stayed over 7 hours at the studios – my kids would start a riot if we had to leave after some 4 hours only!

Thanks for reading, Deesi! And great tips! Appreciate you sharing. 🙂

Your blog is amazing. How do I download the cheat sheet??

Thank you ~Alison

Thanks so much for reading, Alison. All you need to do is fill in the fields on the cheat sheet sign up box. It’ll get sent to you. 🙂 So glad the blog has been helpful for you.

If you have enough time you should certainly consider Kew Gardens and Greenwich. You can take the clipper down the river to Greenwich. Also Kenwood is free to visit and set in beautiful grounds on Hampstead Heath. Don’t pay to go up the Shard. Book the free tickets for Skygarden three weeks ahead. Or go up the tower at Tate Modern. Children like all these places but as other people have said the parks are lovely and all different. It’s lovely to see this thread still working and growing after such a long time. Well done!!!

Thanks for reading and sharing your London tips, Marian! I didn’t know that about the Shard!

The Dorchester is indeed a great hotel, but the very best Afternoon Tea has to be the Ritz.

Thanks for reading and sharing, David. I have heard great things about the afternoon tea at the Ritz. I’ll have to try it next time I’m in London. 🙂

Thank you for sharing this info about London. I am planning to visit in a neaxt month.

Thanks for reading, Alina. Have fun in London. 🙂

Amazing. you have told very easy and splendid ways for exploring London. London is my favourite place to travel and for food too. I love the food Enjoy!

Thanks for reading, Amy. Glad you had great travels to London. 🙂

My niece and I want to go to London. We’ve considered a tour group, but the itinerary is limited, I enjoyed reading your cheat sheet. It was interesting, and we got very excited at the thought of actually visiting the sites, Have you ever traveled there in December? I am a teacher and my big break is in the month of December, I don’t want to go and freeze! The travel dates would be between December 14th and December 24th. Any tips would be appreciated. Thank you.

Rebecca and Brooke

Thanks for reading, Rebecca and Brooke. I haven’t been to London in the winter but I’ve been to many other cities in Europe in winter like Paris, Prague, Budapest, Munich, and more, also during my winter school breaks! I’m probably not the most objective person on this as I live in NYC and walk around outside all winter long. But I love European cities around Christmas. Yes, it’s chilly. But if you dress right the charm and the ambiance is unforgettable. I’d highly recommend a London Christmas visit! If you want some freedom to explore mixed with a few organized activities, plan a couple of day tours instead of something more comprehensive. The London Pass is also a great way to see what’s popular while saving money by bundling sightseeing costs. Hope this helps and you have a great trip! 😉

Thank you so much. We are moving ahead with our plans. I agree, if you dress appropriately, the weather will not be a factor.. Again, I really learned a lot from your cheat sheet and have read it many times.

Thanks for reading, Rebecca and Brooke. 🙂 So glad to hear the cheat sheet was helpful. I hope you have a wonderful trip to London.

Heathrow express!! Saved me so much time! So glad I read this.

Thanks for reading, Scott. Yep, the Heathrow Express makes things super easy! 🙂

Thanks for informative sharing. I must say that your shared information is very useful for me as well as other readers.

Glad to hear it, William. Thanks for reading.

Hello Jackie, I am at the beginning of planning a second Girls Trip to London, and the country side of England. The first was with a group of high school girls friends,(tons of fun) and this one will be with all my sister in laws. Both groups are in their early 60’s. I appreciated the link to the GO transportation site. I like the idea of a van to haul us all to the hotel from Heathrow. There will be six of us in this up coming trip. There were only four on the high school trip. We all squeezed into one cab, and shared the cost. I don’t think we can squeeze six ladies and luggage into a cab, so the van idea sounds good. I suggested a cab for the HS group, knowing it is the more expensive way to get from the airport. I knew we would be sharing the cost AND also with the age of the group, didn’t think we (or I ) would want to be dragging our luggage in and out of tube trains. They were all ok with the idea of a cab. Also one thing I tell anyone I know who is on their way over, WEAR COMFORTABLE SHOES!!! I know they aren’t always the most fashionable, but gee, your feet will thank you at the end of the day. No new shoes that haven’t been wore in yet either. One last thought– the HS trip was a full week in London, so we all decided that the London Pass would be a good idea– and it was! The Shard visit alone would have cost 50 pounds for one person to enter. The payable sites do add up. All worth seeing, but can get pricy. Not so sure it will be worth it for this sister in law trip, we won’t be spending as much time in London. Thanks for the time and research you put into this travel blog. Very enjoyable read. 🙂

Thanks so much for reading, Deborah! So exciting to be planning another trip (and a Girls Trip, even better!) to London. Thanks for sharing your experiences, too. Totally agree on comfortable shoes! My go-to’s for lots of walking (live in NYC) and traveling (one pair is with me on every trip) are Allbirds . In fact, I just bought 2 new pairs (Tree Runner & Wool Runner) since I’ve worn my others out. If anyone in your group or you are looking for something comfy, definitely give these shoes a look. Enjoy your trip to London and come back if there are any questions I can answer. Thanks again for reading. 🙂

Leave a Comment Cancel Reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

Privacy Overview

See the best of Britain by train (2 week itinerary + maps & tips)

By: Author Tracy Collins

Posted on Last updated: April 19, 2024

Follow our 14-day itinerary to see the best of Britain by train including top destinations in England, Wales and Scotland. We’ve done all the planning so you don’t have to!

Do you have 14 days to explore Britain but are struggling to put together an itinerary? Not sure what places to include or how to get around? You will find everything you need to know to see the best of Britain by train in this article.

We have included 5 of Britain’s most popular destinations in 3 countries – London, Bath, Cardiff, Edinburgh, and York with the option of choosing between 2 others -the Lake District and Liverpool – on days 7 and 8.

For each destination included in the itinerary, you will find recommendations of what to do and see, accommodation suggestions, and logistics plus practical details and tips to ensure your 14-day train trip around England, Wales and Scotland is everything you dream of.

I have also included a map illustrating the points of travel, the distance between destinations, and the estimated travel time for each leg of the journey.

Good to know! For non-UK citizens we recommend purchasing a BritRail Pass or the Eurail Global Rail Pass for this 2-week itinerary – click to find out more about BritRail passes & Eurail Global Rail Passes or here to read our comparison guide.

Days 1 – 3 London

Day 4 london – bath, day 5 bath (day trip – cotswolds or stonehenge), day 6 bath – cardiff, day 7 cardiff – liverpool or lake district, day 8 – liverpool or lake district, day 9 liverpool or lake district to edinburgh, day 10 edinburgh, day 11 edinburgh (or day trip), scotland by rail itinerary, day 12 edinburgh to york, day 13 – york, day 14 – york to london, listen to our introduction to uk train travel podcast, what train cards or passes are recommended for this uk train travel itinerary, where can i buy train tickets, what do i need to know about travelling the uk by train, can i take luggage on uk trains.

• Are any of the UK's scenic train routes included in this itinerary?

Enjoy your UK train travel adventure

See britain by train with our 14 day itinerary.

A minimum of 3 days in London is recommended especially if it is your first visit to the city . This will give you enough time to see the main London landmarks and tick some attractions off your London bucket list.

This 14-day Best of Britain by train itinerary begins with Days 1/2 and 3 in London and ends on Day 14 back in the capital. Depending on your flight or onward travel itinerary, you may have some flexibility to add a few more sights in London .

London Day 1

I recommend spending your first day visiting some of the most popular London attractions, landmarks, and sights.

If you are feeling energetic a self-directed walking tour of the main sights located in central London is one option.

Alternatively, consider booking a guided tour. We recommend the London In a Day: Tower of London, Westminster Abbey & Changing of the Guard tour from Take Walks . This comprehensive tour is dedicated to the quintessential sights of the city: Westminster Abbey, Tower Bridge, Changing of the Guard, a Thames river cruise, and a full Tower of London tour with access to the Crown Jewels.

If you prefer to take it easy on your first day (don’t discount the effects of jetlag), a hop-on hop-off bus tour is another option and a great way to orient yourself with the city.

London Day 2

If you did not visit the Tower of London on Day 1 I would recommend starting your morning by exploring this ancient and historic landmark.

Afterwards, walk to the 43rd floor of the Walkie-Talkie building for lunch at the Sky Garden (London’s highest public garden). Entry to the Sky Garden is free but it is essential to book tickets ahead of your visit.

In the vicinity of the Sky Garden are 4 other landmarks and buildings worth visiting – St Dunstan in the East Church Garden, Pudding Lane, St Paul’s Cathedral, and Leadenhall Market.

After exploring the area jump on the Central Line at St Paul’s changing at Holborn for the Piccadilly Line to Covent Garden. Enjoy the street entertainment, shops, and attractions around Covent Garden before dinner and a show.

London Day 3

Today I recommend visiting the British Museum in the morning. The museum is always busy so try to arrive as early in the day as possible. I recommend purchasing a ticket that enables you to skip the line so you don’t waste precious vacation time in a queue.

If you are visiting with children we recommend this private customised family-friendly tour of the museum with a special children’s guide. During the 2 hour tour, you will enjoy favourite displays such as the Egyptian mummies and the Rosetta Stone with your guide.

For your final afternoon in the city, I have a few alternatives depending on your interests.

If you enjoy shopping head to Harrods. If you enjoy history a trip to Churchill’s War Rooms is a great option. If you have young kids head to London Zoo or – if they are up for another museum – the Natural History Museum in South Kensington. If you have visited London previously and are seeking something different I highly recommend jumping on the Thames Clipper to Greenwich.

For those of you with specific interests, this may also be a great time to do a themed tour – Harry Potter, James Bond, Jack the Ripper are some examples of the themed walking tours available in London .

These are just a few ideas for your first 3 days in London – please see our detailed itinerary posts for more.

On Day 4 depart London for the South West of England and one of England’s most beautiful and oldest cities – Bath!

For centuries Bath’s naturally warm and mineral-rich waters attracted those who sought its curative powers and potential for rejuvenation.

Roman Baths constructed nearly 2000 years ago, stunning Georgian architecture, a museum dedicated to Jane Austen and numerous boutiques, independent shops and tea houses are just some of the attractions of the city.

Tip – Take an early train from London and you will have most of the day to explore.

🌟 Highlights of Bath

• Roman Baths
• Royal Crescent
• Jane Austen Centre

Read more – One day Bath Itinerary – follow our one day in Bath itinerary to see the cities sights, attractions and landmarks.

Read more – Bath Travel Guide – our complete guide to visiting Bath including accommodation suggestions, where to eat, and what to read before you visit.

🗺 Logistics London – Bath

• London to Bath travel time by train is approximately 1 hour 20 minutes  
• Depart London Paddington (Platform 5 typically) arrives Bath Spa (Platform 1 typically)
• This is a direct train service with Great Western Railways

🏨 Accommodation options in Bath

• Best luxury spa hotel in Bath –  The Gainsborough Bath Spa  is a luxury 5* hotel and the only UK hotel to have access to naturally heated thermal waters within its Spa Village.
• Best mid-range hotel in Bath –  Eight  is a small independent boutique hotel in the centre of Bath.
• Best budget option in Bath –  Grays  is a boutique B&B situated in an imposing semi-detached Victorian villa located 15 minutes from the centre of Bath.
• Find more options in my guide to the best places to stay in Bath

On day 5 you have a few options. Bath is close to two of England’s most popular destinations and I highly recommend including at least one of them in your itinerary.

Your options are

Spend another day exploring Bath OR

• Take a day tour from Bath and explore the beautiful Cotswold villages and/or Stonehenge OR
• Travel independently taking the train from Bath to Salisbury and catch the Stonehenge tour bus from there.

We will explore these options in more detail so you can decide which you prefer.

☂️ Day tour options from Bath

I have picked the best day tour options to the Cotswolds available from Bath. Stonehenge is also included in some of these tours.

If you decide to include both destinations (Cotswolds & Stonehenge) in one tour bear in mind that you will have less tim e to explore the Cotswolds but this may be the best option if you really want to see both.

It is possible to travel to Stonehenge independently using public transport from Bath to Salisbury (and onto Stonehenge) but I have included some day tours too so you can choose the best option for your needs.

Day tours from Bath to the Cotswolds

• ‘Stonehenge & Secret England’ Private Full-Day Tour from Bath – Private tour to Stonehenge then personalize your sightseeing to visit castles or gardens, or take a film location tour of medieval villages featured in ‘Harry Potter,’ ‘Downton Abbey,’ and other hits.
• Full-day private Cotswolds tour from Bath – Explore idyllic villages and famous Cotswold towns on this 9-hour full-day tour. This will give you a wonderful overview and experience of what the Cotswolds is all about.

Day tour from Bath including Stonehenge

• Stonehenge, Avebury stone circles & stunning Cotswold Villages – Full-day tour which includes the beautiful villages of Lacock and Castle Combe.

Day tours from Bath to Stonehenge

• Stonehenge Private Tour (Half-Day Tour from Bath) – Includes a detailed guide to Stonehenge and private end-to-end transportation from your Bath hotel.
• Bespoke private tours of Stonehenge and Avebury by car with a local guide – Half or full-day tour to the prehistoric stone circles at Stonehenge and Avebury.

🗺 Logistics – Bath to Salisbury (Stonehenge)

• Bath to Salisbury travel time by train is approximately 1 hour  
• Depart Bath Spa arrives in Salisbury 

On day 6 hop on the train for a journey of just over an hour to a new country – Wales . The Welsh capital of Cardiff is the buzzing centre of this Celtic nation.

Crammed with cultural hotspots, charming Victorian architecture, a rich history, impressive castles, and modern urban hangouts, Cardiff has a whole heap of things for visitors to do and see.

🌟 Highlights of Cardiff

• Cardiff Castle
• Sail Cardiff Bay
• Stroll the Centenary Walk through the city
• Take a themed Dr Who or Gavin & Stacey tour

Read more – Things to do in Cardiff

🗺 Logistics Bath – Cardiff

• Bath to Cardiff travel time by train is approximately 1 hour 12 minutes  
• Depart Bath Spa (Platform 1 typically) arrives Cardiff Central (Platform 3/4 typically)

🏨 Accommodation options on Cardiff

• Best luxury spa hotel in Cardiff – Voco St David’s Hotel is a waterfront hotel with balconies, bay views, and a luxury spa.
• Best mid-range hotels in Cardiff – 4*  Hotel Indigo Cardiff  offers modern accommodation and a rather splendid Marco Pierre White restaurant!
• Best budget option in Cardiff – Hotel Number One Hundred   is a boutique-style B&B offering superb value for money.

On Day 7 you can choose to either spend a few days exploring the city of Liverpool or alternatively a rural experience in the beautiful Lake District.

If you are a fan of the Beatles Liverpool is the must-visit destination. Take the Magical Mystery tour and visit the childhood homes of Paul and John before dancing the night away at the Cavern Club.

Alternatively head to the Lake District and explore its stunning lakes and mountains, quaint towns and villages , from your base in Windermere .

🗺 Logistics Cardiff – Liverpool

• Cardiff Central to Liverpool Lime Street travel time by train is approximately 3 hours 25 mins.   
• Depart Cardiff Central (Platform 1/2 typically) arrives Crewe (platform 6 change trains and depart at platform 6) to Liverpool Lime Street (Platform 9 typically)
• There is one change required at Crewe. Transport for Wales trains from Cardiff to Crewe and then Crewe to Liverpool on Avanti West Coast

🏨 Accommodation in Liverpool

• Best Liverpool Hotel for Beatles fans –  The Hard Days Night Hotel  is decorated with Beatles memorabilia and located around the corner from the Cavern Club – our number one choice when staying in Liverpool.
• Best mid-range hotel in Liverpool –  The Titanic Hotel is located in a historic warehouse in the UNESCO World Heritage Stanley Dock. Spacious rooms in a unique setting.
• Best budget option in Liverpool –  The Resident Liverpool   offers affordable accommodation in a central location.

⭐️ Find more options in my area & accommodation guide to Liverpool

Lake District

🗺 Logistics Cardiff – Lake District

• Cardiff to Windermere in the Lake District train time is approximately 6 hours with 2 changes required.  
• Depart Cardiff arrives Windermere
• Change at Crewe (arrive and depart platform 6) and catch the Avanti West Coast to Lancaster (arrive and depart from platform 3) on Northern Trains to Windermere (Platform 1).

🏨 Accommodation in the Lake District

• Best luxury hotel in Windermere –  Macdonald Old English Hotel and Spa  is a luxury 5* hotel and spa perched on the shores of Lake Windermere.
• Best mid-range hotel in Windermere –  Cragwood Country House Hotel is located in stunning gardens on the shores of Lake Windermere. It offers spacious rooms, exceptional food, and a relaxing experience for guests.
• Best budget (ish) hotel in Windermere – The 3* Windermere Manor Hotel is an 1850’s stone manor house offering dog-friendly accommodation.

Tip – More accommodation options can be found in my guide to the best places to stay in Lake Windermere

🌟 Highlights of Liverpool

• Albert Dock
• Beatles Tour
• Tate Modern
• Enjoy a football match 

Read more – Liverpool Travel Guide (including tips, itinerary & map

🌟 Highlights of the Lake District

• Boat trip across Windermere
• Take a Hike and enjoy stunning views
• Visit Hill Top the former home of Beatrix Potter
• Enjoy a drink in an English pub  

Read more – Lake District Travel Guide

On day 9 travel from Liverpool or the Lake District to Edinburgh. Journey time from both departure points is around 3 – 4 hours so you will arrive in plenty of time to start exploring the sights of Edinburgh.

Top tip – Book a hotel near the train station, drop your bags, and head out to the Royal Mile and soak in the atmosphere of the Scottish capital. This hop-on-hop-off bus pass is great to explore Edinburgh at your own pace with a 3-route tour ticket.

🗺 Logistics – Liverpool to Edinburgh

• Liverpool Lime Street to Edinburgh travel time by train is approximately 3 hours 45 minutes  
• Depart Liverpool Lime Street arrives Edinburgh
• One change at Preston in Lancashire.

🗺 Logistics – Windermere to Edinburgh

• Windermere to Edinburgh travel time by train is approximately 3 hours 10 minutes.
• Depart Windermere arrives Edinburgh Waverley
• Depending on time of travel 1 or 2 changes at Oxenholme in the Lake District (and possibly an additional change at Carlisle) .

🏨 Accommodation in Edinburgh

• Best luxury hotel in Edinburgh –  The Balmoral is a luxury 5* hotel
• Best mid-range hotel in Edinburgh –  Radisson Blu Hotel Edinburgh City Centre
• Best budget option in Edinburgh –  Elder York Guest House

Scotland’s capital is historically rich and scenically beautiful. The winding cobblestone streets of its Old Town offer quaint medieval charm which is contrasted by the New Town, the very epitome of Georgian style.

There is culture and history around every corner and numerous landmarks, sights, and attractions to explore.

🌟 Highlights of Edinburgh

• Edinburgh Castle
• Walk the Royal Mile
• Shop on Princes Street
• Enjoy the views from Arthur’s Seat 

Read more – Things to do in Edinburgh

Day 11 provides a couple of options. You could spend more time exploring Edinburgh OR take a day trip to see more of Scotland’s famous sights, landmarks, and attractions.

☂️ Best day trips from Edinburgh

There are some fantastic day trips you can do from Edinburgh. You could hire a car for the day but we recommend either jumping on the train or taking an organised tour especially if you want to fit as much as possible into your day.

Destinations which can be reached easily by train from Edinburgh in 2 hours or less include:

• St Andrews (1½ hours)
• South Queensferry (30 mins)
• The Kelpies & Helix Park (1 hour)
• Glasgow (1 hour)
• Pitlochry (2 hours)
• Linlithgow Palace (20 mins)
• Dundee (1 hour 30 mins)
• Stirling Castle (1 hour)
• Loch Lomond (1 hour 40 mins)

We recommend the following day tours from Edinburgh:

• Hogwarts Express and Scottish Highlands Tour – Escape the city for the day and head to the Scottish Highlands. Follow in the footsteps of the world’s most famous wizard, Harry Potter, and jump on board the Hogwarts Express on an unforgettable journey on the Jacobite Steam Train.
• Loch Ness, Glencoe & the Highlands Tour from Edinburgh – Enjoy a full-day tour and experience some of the most dramatic scenery the Scottish Highlands has to offer. Spend time at mysterious Glencoe and have the chance to enjoy a cruise on Loch Ness and a visit to Urquhart Castle.
• Loch Lomond, Kelpies, and Stirling Castle Small-Group Tour – Discover the Scottish Highlands on a full-day small-group tour, and see forests, lochs, and stunning mountains. Explore Scotland’s history and learn about its greatest heroes with visits to Stirling Castle, Loch Lomond, and more.
• Loch Ness, Highlands & Whisky Distillery Tour – Experience the natural beauty of the Scottish Highlands on a full-day coach tour to Loch Ness, Glencoe, and the Trossachs National Park. Go to a working whisky distillery for an optional tasting. Stop for lunch in Fort Augustus and more.

Why not combine this best of Britain by rail itinerary with our Scotland rail itinerary?

We have done the work for you and produced a 21 day + plus complete UK rail itinerary which includes the best of England, Scotland and Wales.

On Day 12 depart Edinburgh for York. This ancient city is located halfway between Edinburgh and London and its medieval city walls, museums, and shops make this the perfect destination for the last stop on your 14-day tour of Britain.

Journey time is around 2½ hours.

Good to know – Book a seat on the left side of the train (facing direction of travel) for views of the beautiful Northumberland coastline as you journey towards Newcastle and look out for the iconic Angel of the North after departure.

The train passes through Durham and Darlington before arriving in York.

🗺 Logistics Edinburgh – York

• Edinburgh Waverley to York travel time by train is approximately 2 hour 25 minutes  
• Depart Edinburgh Waverley arrives York
• This is a direct train service with London North Eastern Railway (LNER)

🏨 Accommodation in York

• Best luxury hotel in York – The Grand York is the only 5* hotel in York. Chic, luxury rooms in a grand Edwardian hotel.
• Best mid-range hotel in York – The Bar Convent is England’s oldest living convent and one of the most unique places to stay in York.
• Best budget option in York – Wheatlands Lodge offers good value accommodation only 5 minutes walk away from York train station.

🌟 Highlights of York

• York Minster
• Walk the Walls
• The Shambles
• The Jorvik Viking Centre 

Read more – York Travel Guide

Day 14 is the final leg of this UK train itinerary and will take you from York back to London.

Journey time is a little over 2 hours which means (depending on your flight time) there is the possibility of spending a few more hours exploring London.

🗺 Logistics York – London

• York to London Kings Cross travel time by train is approximately 2 hours 10 minutes
• Depart York arrives London King’s Cross
• This is a direct train service with LNER

FAQs – Travelling the UK by train

If you are considering following this UK rail trip itinerary the easiest and most cost-effective way to travel is to either purchase a BritRail Pass or a Global Eurail Pass . These tickets are only available for overseas visitors so buy them before you arrive.

What are the advantages of purchasing a BritRail Pass?

• The Britrail M-Pass is an electronic rail pass that can be downloaded directly onto your phone. Also available to print as a PDF copy if you prefer.
• No need to stress over searching for ticket prices and booking each leg of your journey separately.
• No need to stick to a rigid timetable as you can travel as much as you like on each day your BritRail Pass is valid.
• Easier than searching for ticket prices for every leg of the journey.
• Cheaper than buying individual tickets.
• Children travel free with most passes. A family of 4 will only pay for 2 adults.
• No queuing at ticket offices to purchase your ticket – just head to the platform and hop on the train.
• Airport transfers by rail are included (Heathrow Express, Gatwick Express, and the Stansted Express)

For the itinerary above I recommend purchasing a Britrail GB M-Pass or a Global Eurail Pass as these passes enable unlimited travel across the full length of England, Wales, and Scotland.

I recommend comparing these passes before you buy as you may find one is more cost-effective for your trip.

Click for more information and to purchase BritRail Passes

Click for more information and to purchase a Global Eurail Pass

For this 2 week itinerary, I recommend purchasing a Britrail Pass or a Global Eurail Pass .

If you are planning to take a limited number of train trips purchasing individual tickets may be more cost-effective.

• 🗓 Purchase prior to travel for the cheapest train tickets .
• 🚆 Bookings open 12 weeks (84 days) before the date of travel.
• 🎫 Tickets can be purchased online via thetrainline.com
• ⚠️ Reservations are compulsory on many services.
• 😷 Check regulations in regard to Covid-19 prior to travel.

Our complete guide to travelling the UK by train details everything you need to know including how and where to buy tickets, tips for your day of travel and what to expect from your UK train trip.

You can take up to 3 pieces of luggage for free on UK trains including 2 large items such as suitcases or rucksacks.

Store luggage in overhead luggage racks, under the seats, and in the luggage compartments at the end of each carriage.

Are any of the UK’s scenic train routes included in this itinerary?

Some of the most scenic train journeys in the UK are included in this itinerary including the East Coast Mainline from Edinburgh to York.

If you are planning a UK rail trip itinerary for the first time you will find our comprehensive guide to using the UK train network an invaluable resource.

Written by Doug Collins who worked on UK railways for over 25 years it contains practical information, tips, and advice to ensure you make the most of your UK rail adventure.

Read more – Complete guide to travelling the UK by train

• 13 Tips to save money on rail travel in the UK
• 9 tips for those planning to travel the UK by rail
• Guide to the 9 regions of England
• UK trip planner
• Guide to English drinks

Join our Adventure: Get all my insider tips for motorhoming & road trips

England Road Trip: 50 Unmissable ideas (for every UK itinerary)

Planning an England road trip? Here are some of the best itinerary ideas for all schedules, including London to Cornwall, the Cotswolds and Kent in southern England, National Parks like the Lake District or Peak District, Northern England and all the way up to the Scottish border.

Whatever your cup of tea, there’s a UK road trip idea here for you. We’ve also provided a helpful map so you can visualise your route.

*We work hard to make this the best motorhome travel blog and road trip website possible, full of helpful content for you. The website is supported by our readers, so if you buy through links on this site we may earn a commission- at no extra cost to you. All opinions remain our own .

If you find this post useful, you can also treat us to a coffee – we promise to enjoy it while creating more useful content like this- we might even indulge in a biscuit (or two!)

JUMP AHEAD TO...

UK Road Trips- How to Plan

Planning a UK road trip to England or elsewhere can be tough. 

There are SO MANY places, ideas, options and reviews- how on earth are you supposed to choose the best way or most scenic drives?

Then, you have to factor in how long you have for your UK road trip (remembering that much of rural UK has smaller, slower roads, so it takes a lot longer to get there than you might expect. 

So, if you’re planning a road trip around England (and the UK) and feeling overwhelmed, here are some of our favourite road trips and itinerary ideas to help you. We’ll discuss the best bits of each area, why and when you should visit, how far it is from London and where you should allow extra time to explore.

England Road Trip Ideas- Where to Start

The first thing to decide is where you want to visit on your road trip. Also, remember that England is only one section of the UK- there are several other countries to explore (England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland make up the United Kingdom).

So, if you want to do a full UK road trip, you’ll need more time than if you were just doing an England road trip.

Our biggest tip is not to overface yourself. Whether you only have a long weekend for a quick trip from London or a week to get out on the open road and tour, make sure you leave time to actually get out of your vehicle and explore the places you’re visiting- you’ll find plenty of historic sites, sandy beaches and incredible routes to enjoy. 

Roughly speaking, you can split England in half- the South of England and the North  (the line roughly goes through Birmingham) or even further into quarters if you only have time for a one-week road trip. 

Again, how far you can travel will depend on how much time you have, as well as how you are travelling (rental car, motorhome or public transport), but to do each half ‘properly’ we would recommend at least 2-3 weeks- especially if it’s your first time in England.

Having said that, you can see some of the best sights in less time than that- here’s our one week in England road trip itinerary .

Make planning your next road trip EASY (& fun!)

When you’re planning a road trip, keeping track & organising all your ideas is often the hardest part. Fix that TODAY with our printable pdf road trip planner. Grab yours FREE now

This form subscribes you to our mailing list. We share tips, itineraries, stupid mistakes and guides like this for road trippers and motorhomers.

We never spam (yuck) and you can unsubscribe at any time.

Where to stay during your England road trip

If you’re planning a motorhome or campervan trip , you’ll be able to travel and stop along the way, often without booking in advance, using schemes like Brit Stops or wild camping in your motorhome .

If you’re in a car or motorbike, there are PLENTY of hotels and BnBs to use en route. If you’re travelling in summer we recommend booking at least the first stop in advance- if you use Booking.com for all your accommodation you’ll find you can get a great deal and save a lot of money.

England Road Trip Map

I know how hard it can be to visualise places if you don’t know the country well, so here’s a map of England with several of the road trip destinations shown on it.

Out of interest, if you did this route, it’s about 1056 miles (1700km) long. You could technically do it in a week, but you’d barely have time to get out of the car!

Common England Road Trip Questions

How long does it take to drive the whole of england .

Many people wonder “ How long does it take to drive the whole of England ?” That’s a tough question, as there are so many places to go and depends a lot on your starting point.

Most people allow 2-3 weeks to drive through as much of England as they can, but that will involve a LOT of driving. Of course, you can take a look at the road trip itinerary ideas below and see which scenic route or quaint villages most appeal to you- and then plan your trip around that.

One common UK road trip idea is to drive from Land’s End in Cornwall all the way up to John o’Groats in Scotland, which is about 838miles (1350km). Obviously, this is a road trip which involves England AND Scotland, and that brings me to another important point.

Want to rent a vehicle for your road trip?

These might help:

• Discover incredible deals for motorhome/ camper rentals
• Find the best deals for car rental

READ: 10 essential questions to ask before you rent a motorhome

Can we go to England by road?

This is a common question for anyone who doesn’t live in the UK- and the short answer is yes, you can drive to England from mainland Europe.

Whether you’re enjoying a European road trip (here are some ideas for you ), or want to combine a trip to England with another country, you can drive to England from Europe via either the Eurotunnel or taking one of several car ferries (they also take motorhomes/ campervans on most of the ferry routes.)

If you’re planning a road trip from France to England, which route you take will depend on which part of France and England you want to visit- find out more in our Eurotunnel vs Ferry post.

And if you’re going the other way and will be driving in Europe, make sure you are aware of the new rules for driving in Europe after BREXIT .

If you’re like more help planning your trip, this post about how to plan an epic UK road trip will help.

Is England the UK or Great Britain?

Neither. And part of both 🙂

It’s common for people to confuse an England road trip with a UK road trip. England is just one country within the UK, along with Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. If you want to extend your trip and see more of those countries, you might enjoy our post on the best UK road trips and scenic drive ideas.

The UK is short for ‘The United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland’.

Great Britain is the LANDMASS of the largest island in the British Isles (the one which makes up England, Wales and Scotland). Northern Ireland, Isle of Man and the Channel Islands are not included in this.

And, to make things even more odd, the British Isles includes ALL the islands, including the whole of Ireland, which isn’t part of the UK at all.

Thoroughly confused? Ok, let’s just stick to England road trip ideas! 🙂

South England Road Trip Ideas

If you’re visiting London and want to explore part of the country for a few days, southern England is a good place to start. Of course, there are a HUGE number of places to explore in ‘South England’ (which is roughly classed as anywhere below Birmingham), so I’m just going to pick a few highlights to inspire you.

Cornwall- South West England

Cornwall is one of my favourite places to road trip in England. I spent 2 years living there whilst I was in the Navy, and have been back many times since. There are plenty of things to do in Cornwall , but there are some important tips you need to know before you arrive!

Why is Cornwall one of the best England road trips?

If you want cute villages, incredible beaches and more history than you can shake a stick at, Cornwall is perfect. Also, they have some of the best ice cream IN THE WORLD (no kidding) and it’s perfectly acceptable to eat a scone with jam and clotted cream EVERY day and no one will judge you.

IMPORTANT NOTE : There is intense rivalry between Devon and Cornwall over whether jam or cream should go first on a scone. In Cornwall, they do jam and THEN cream, which is apparently the way the Queen preferred her scones .

(Don’t worry, they’re used to tourists and won’t stone you if you get it wrong. But be warned if you want to live there…!) 

In Devon, they do it the other way. I’ve tried both, and I’m a jam first girl (because you can then put more cream on!)

When should you visit Cornwall?

Cornwall is best anytime between Easter and mid-October.

TOP TIP : Avoid July and August if you possibly can. The schools are on holiday and it feels like EVERYONE in England has travelled to the same small Cornish village as you.

Beaches are overcrowded, parking becomes a struggle and there’s a very real chance of shops running out of ice cream. Don’t do that to yourself. You deserve that ice cream.

Also, many businesses and attractions close after mid-October for the winter, so you might find you can’t do everything you want to outside the season.

Having said that, we find Cornwall one of the best places to enjoy Autumn in Europe – the weather is still warm, but everywhere is quieter and easier to get to.

How long should you spend roadtripping Cornwall?

How long is a piece of string!! But, as you can see on our Cornish road trip itinerary , we recommend 7-10 days minimum to see all the best places.

Where are the best places to visit in Cornwall on a road trip?

Did I mention that I used to live here? I have SO many recommendations for places to visit we could be here all week!!! Some of my absolute favourites (and this is like choosing my favourite child… or chocolate bar) include:

• Tintagel Castle (the home of Arthur and the round table)
• Minack Theatre (built onto the side of a cliff)
• St Michael’s Mount
• Boscastle (where one of the best witchcraft museums in the world is!)
• Newquay beach (and bars!)

READ MORE: Discover our complete Cornwall road trip itinerary (45 places you HAVE to see!)

Recommended by Ben at Driftwood Journals

Famed for its endless rolling hills, craggy coastlines and clotted cream delights, Devon is unsurprisingly one of the most popular destinations in the UK – and a dream for rural road-trippers! With wild moors galore, cutesy towns and villages, and bountiful beaches, you don’t have to drive far in Devon to stumble upon scenes of unparalleled beauty.

Highlights and best places to visit in Devon

• Dartmouth- one of the best towns in the county (and home of the Royal Naval Officer training. I spent a year here…running up those bl***y hills!) Hire a boat and explore the river.
• Paignton- the beach with the red sand and is also known as the English Riviera.
• Dartmoor National Park
• Exmoor National Park
• Exmouth with its beautiful painted houses
• Salcombe Harbour – a holiday hotspot for all generations.
• Dulverton- head to the Copper Kettle tearoom; you won’t regret it!

Devon road trip ideas

Pack up your motorhome/ camper (or car with tent) and find a site with views across the Devonshire cow-grazed hillsides of the Lyn Valley, or out over Dartmoor. You can wild camp in Devon, but not on the moors. Find out more about motorhome wild camping in the UK.

For a coastal trip, explore sea towns like Salcombe and Dartmouth (where you can take a boat up to Greenway, Agatha Christie’s summer home) and round to Exmouth, before heading north to Woolacombe, Dawlish and the fishing boat bobbing harbour of Ilfracombe. Enjoy the bustle and culture in the capital of Exeter or discover the notorious prison of Dartmoor.

Alternatively, head to North Devon and enjoy the wilder seas and views of the north coast. This is a great area for surfing and watersports.

If you have more time (and fuel) to burn, take to the A386 between Appledore and Plymouth, traversing through forested valleys to picture-perfect towns like Great Torrington and Tavistock, where you can tour the tearooms and plan the rest of your trip in the park while dangling your toes in the River Tavy.

But the true beauty of road tripping in Devon is that you don’t really need to plan too extensively. You’ll never be far from a cream tea pitstop, and the verdant country roads will offer up some of the most perfect picnic spots you’ll ever see. All you need is is a full tank, and a little patience when stuck behind tractor after tractor!

When is the best time to visit Devon on a road trip?

As with Cornwall, the best time to visit Devon is Spring to Autumn, but avoid the high summer months if you can, especially if you’re on a UK motorhome holiday .

Can you visit Devon on a day trip from London?

You can, but it’s quite a long drive. I’d say you’d need at least 2 or 3 days to really be able to explore anything.

Dorset- One of England’s Best Road Trips

Recommended by Paul | Anywhere We Roam

The Jurassic Coast stretches 95 miles across Dorset in southern England. With an iconic coastline of towering white cliffs, it’s an excellent destination for a classic road trip. Stunning scenery, historical sites and local breweries make the Jurassic Coast one of the best places to experience the beautiful English countryside.

Dorset road trip- best places to visit?

The main highlight of a road trip to Dorset in the area has to be Old Harry Rocks – a collection of white stone monoliths that have been carved out along the coast. It’s one of the most impressive stretches of scenery in the UK with dazzling chalk stacks assembled like a jigsaw puzzle waiting to be completed. If you get time, be sure to enjoy one of the many fabulous Dorset walks- you won’t regret it.

A thirty-minute drive away, Corfe Castle stands as a reminder of England’s 11th-Century past. It was one of the earliest Norman castles built and today it glows in its dilapidated glory overlooking the Dorset hills. It’s a stunning, photogenic inclusion on a UK road trip.

For another natural phenomenon, Durdle Door is possibly one of the most recognisable symbols of the Jurassic Coast. Over time, crashing waves have eroded limestone stacks in the sea leaving a glorious natural arch.

It’s a beautiful stretch of beach, ideal for a long summer stroll. It’s also next to the famous Lulworth Cove, which is a wonderful place to enjoy an ice cream!

Editors note: (I (Kat) actually jumped off the top of Durdle Door on my hen party!)

After soaking up the stunning scenery, head west to Lyme Regis, a quaint town with a vibrant independent retail scene. The historic Cobb Harbour set against moody cliffs is well-preserved and houses some of the best coffee in the area.

When is the best time to visit Dorset on an England road trip?

The best time to visit the Jurassic Coast on a road trip is from May to early July when the surrounding countryside will be verdant green and covered in wildflowers, but there’s not too much traffic!

Hampshire road trip

Hampshire is another county in England we know well, having lived here for 14+ years. There’s plenty to enjoy on a road trip to Hampshire, from beautiful cities to picturesque country houses.

Highlights of a Hampshire road trip

Some of our favourite places to visit in Hampshire include:

• Winchester- be sure to visit the Cathedral where Jane Austen is buried and you can see one of the oldest Bibles in the world. If you’re lucky enough to be visiting in December, don’t miss the famous Winchester Christmas Market , held in the Cathedral grounds each December.
• Highclere Castle (or Downton Abbey, as you might know it!)
• Lymington – for the oldest open sea water baths in the UK – and the New Forest (check out the Wildlife park there and make sure to take some memorable photos).
• Hinton Ampner- 18th century famous manor house known for its gardens.
• Portsmouth (you MUST go to the Mary Rose museum and HMS Victory)
• Isle of Wight (see below)

Isle of Wight road trip

Recommended by Darek | DarekandGosia

The  Isle of Wight , famous for its beautiful views, is an island on the south coast of England, just below Southampton. Technically, it’s part of Hampshire, but feels like a different world.

With a motorhome or car, you can reach the island by ferry from either Southampton or Portsmouth – book in advance during summer. There are also a couple of foot passenger ferries and a hovercraft from Southsea.

Why is it one of England’s best road trips?

The Isle of Wight is like going back in time. It’s worth a road trip here for even a weekend, to escape the hustle and bustle of normal life, ride bikes and take a walk on the cliffs.

Also, there are some wonderful places to stay. If you’re on a road trip, check out these amazing Isle of Wight campsites – some with stunning sea views!

What is there to do?

You can start exploring the island in Shanklin – one of the coastal villages famous for its beautiful beaches. On the promenade along the sea you will find many restaurants and hotels – most of the Island is typically tourist-oriented.

From Shanklin drive to the western part of the island. The most characteristic point is The Needles – three chalk rocks emerging from the sea with a small lighthouse built at the end of one of the columns. You can get to Needles by car and then follow the path on foot to the cliff slope. It’s a fabulous place for a picnic.

Next to Needles is Old Battery, a military fortification dating from the nineteenth century. There you can find World War II memorabilia or visit one of the various exhibitions are also taking place.

While driving around the island make sure you get to Carisbrooke Castle near Newport. Its construction began in the 12th century. It is worth taking a moment to walk around the castle, relax in the Edwardian-style garden.

One of my favourite places on the Island is Osborne House- Queen Victoria’s summer home. You can walk around the gardens and the house and even enjoy an ice cream on her private beach. Osborne House is run by English Heritage.

When is the best time to visit the Isle of Wight?

The Isle of Wight is a must-see for anyone who wants to admire the British climate and above all fantastic views. It is worth going here all year round – it’s actually one of the best places to visit in Europe in October , when there are fewer tourists and you can enjoy the views & roads!

Norfolk Broads

Recommended by Mandi | Big Family, Little Adventures

Sometimes you want nothing more than to escape the hustle and the bustle of everyday life, the noise, the bright lights, the never-ending pace of life. If you want to get away, the Norfolk Broads is pure escapism; big skies, plenty of peace and quiet and an abundance of wildlife.

Best places to visit in Norfolk on a road trip

• The Old Roman Fort at Burgh Castle with an elevated position and commanding views over the marshes – perfect for a walk in both winter morning frost or a hot and hazy mid-summer evening
• If you prefer a bit of activity, Wroxham is a bustling Broads village- home to Roy’s of Wroxham, possibly the largest village shop you have ever seen
• Plenty of riverside pubs and restaurants in Wroxham and all around the Broads- the perfect places to stop for a bite to eat
• St Benet’s Abbey – an 11th century monastery defying time, standing in a stunning green valley.
• If you are an animal lover, you will enjoy a visit to Wroxham Barns to feed the lambs or spot the grey seals on the Norfolk beaches

Norfolk Road Trip- when is the best time to visit?

You can explore Norfolk all year. In summer, if you would like to explore the best Norfolk beaches or Broads up close, why not hire a dayboat; these can be hired at various boatyards throughout the Broads. Waveney River Centre is another stunning place to stop and admire the view, either by boat or car.

The challenge is (as always in England!) the weather. In dry conditions, most paths are excellent, but it can get a bit more challenging in wet weather.

However, over the years, an increasing number of boardwalks have been developed, increasing safe access to the Broads whatever the weather. Also, seeing the windmills and rivers on a crisp winter morning is unforgettable.

Time does not stop in Norfolk, but it really does feel like it slows down.  To be able to watch the sunset across the broads any time of year is a magical experience and the perfect place to enjoy a chilled road trip.

Sussex, Kent and Surrey

Ahhh, the picturesque south-east corner of England, which includes the Garden of England (that’s the other name for Kent). This area is lush, green and has some many historic buildings and castles you’ll find it impossible to avoid them.

It’s also home to plenty of gorgeous sandy beaches, white cliffs (such as Dover and Beachy Head) and some truly wonderful parks to walk in.

Even better, it’s all easily reached from London by car and train, so it’s easy to get away from the city for a few days if you’d like a countryside break or a trip to the beach.

Best Places to visit in Sussex include:

Sussex is actually split into East and West Sussex, but to make things easy on your road trip I’ve made one list for you. They’re not that far apart from each other!

• Brighton : A vibrant seaside city famous for its pebble beach, iconic pier, and the Royal Pavilion with its distinctive architecture. Explore the Lanes for unique shops and enjoy the city’s lively arts and music scene. See below for more ideas
• Arundel : Home to Arundel Castle, a medieval and Victorian castle that overlooks the River Arun. The town itself is picturesque with cobbled streets and antique shops.
• Chichester : A historic cathedral city with Roman origins, Chichester offers a mix of history, culture, and shopping. The Chichester Cathedral and Pallant House Gallery are notable attractions.
• Lewes : Known for its medieval architecture, Lewes Castle, and historic streets. The Lewes Bonfire Night is a famous annual event.
• Eastbourne : A traditional seaside town with a Victorian pier, beautiful seafront, and the iconic Beachy Head cliffs nearby.
• Rye : A charming medieval town with cobbled streets, half-timbered houses, and views of the surrounding marshland.
• Battle : Famous for the Battle of Hastings in 1066, this town is home to Battle Abbey and the Battlefield. Explore the historic sites and learn about this pivotal event in English history.
• Petworth House and Park : A stately mansion with an impressive art collection set in a vast deer park. The gardens are also worth exploring.
• Seven Sisters Country Park : A stunning coastal area with dramatic chalk cliffs and rolling hills, perfect for hiking and enjoying breathtaking views.
• Bodiam Castle : A 14th-century moated castle surrounded by water and picturesque landscapes.
• Sheffield Park and Garden : A National Trust property known for its stunning gardens, lakes, and vibrant displays of plants.
• Birling Gap and Beachy Head : More stunning chalk cliffs and coastal views, with the added beauty of the natural arch at Birling Gap.
• Glyndebourne Opera House : Known for its world-class opera productions, the opera house is set in beautiful countryside and offers a unique cultural experience.

Best places to visit in Kent include:

• Canterbury – home to the UNESCO World Heritage Site of Canterbury Cathedral
• Dover : Known for the iconic White Cliffs of Dover, this coastal town is home to Dover Castle, which boasts a complex history and offers panoramic views of the English Channel.
• Rochester : A charming town with a medieval castle and cathedral. It’s also the birthplace of Charles Dickens, and you can visit the Dickens World theme park.
• Whitstable : This coastal town is famous for its oysters and seafood. Enjoy the quaint streets, beach huts, and seafood restaurants along the coast.
• Margate : A seaside town with a revived artistic scene, featuring the Turner Contemporary art gallery and the scenic Margate Sands.
• Leeds Castle : Often referred to as the “loveliest castle in the world,” Leeds Castle is set on an island in a lake and surrounded by beautiful gardens.
• Hever Castle : The childhood home of Anne Boleyn, with historic architecture, gardens, and a maze.
• Chatham Historic Dockyard : A maritime museum where you can explore historic warships, submarines, and learn about Britain’s naval history.
• Biddenden Vineyards : If you’re a wine enthusiast, Kent has several vineyards. Biddenden is one of the oldest and most well-known.
• Canterbury Tales Visitor Attraction : An interactive museum where you can step back in time to experience Chaucer’s famous tales.
• St. Augustine’s Abbey : A UNESCO World Heritage Site, this abbey in Canterbury dates back to the 6th century and is a significant historical site.
• Chartwell House : The former home of Winston Churchill, now a museum showcasing his life and legacy.

These are just a few highlights of what Kent has to offer. Whether you’re interested in history, nature, or culture, you’re likely to find something appealing in this diverse and beautiful county.

Best Places to Visit in Surrey

• Box Hill : A National Trust site known for its stunning views and walking trails. It’s a popular spot for outdoor enthusiasts and offers panoramic vistas of the surrounding countryside.
• Polesden Lacey : A grand Edwardian estate with beautiful gardens, Polesden Lacey is a National Trust property that offers a glimpse into the lives of the wealthy in the early 20th century.
• Watts Gallery – Artists’ Village : Located in Compton, this unique attraction is dedicated to the works of Victorian artist George Frederic Watts and his wife Mary Watts. The village includes a gallery, chapel, and artist studios.
• Hampton Court Palace : While part of the palace is in Greater London, the stunning Hampton Court Palace is right on the border of Surrey. It’s famous for its Tudor history, grand architecture, and beautiful gardens.
• RHS Garden Wisley : A flagship garden of the Royal Horticultural Society, Wisley offers a wide variety of plants, landscapes, and garden designs to explore.
• Brooklands Museum : A museum dedicated to motorsport and aviation history, located on the site of the world’s first purpose-built motor racing circuit.
• Loseley Park : A grand Elizabethan manor house surrounded by beautiful gardens and parkland, open to the public during certain times of the year.
• Denbies Wine Estate : England’s largest vineyard, Denbies offers tours, wine tasting, and beautiful views of the surrounding countryside.
• Newlands Corner : Another viewpoint offering breathtaking views of the Surrey Hills, perfect for picnics and outdoor activities.
• Epsom Downs : Known for Epsom Downs Racecourse and the famous Epsom Derby, this area offers open spaces and walking trails.
• Virginia Water : Part of Windsor Great Park, Virginia Water features a lake, ornamental cascades, and woodland walks.

Surrey’s mix of historic sites, natural beauty, and cultural attractions make it a delightful destination for a variety of interests. Whether you’re into history, outdoor activities, or simply enjoying scenic landscapes, Surrey has something to offer.

Brighton – East Sussex

I’ve given Brighton it’s own section because it’s one of my favourite cities in England and you should try to add it to your England road trip itinerary, especially if you’re heading toward East Sussex.

Brighton is a city renowned for its diverse communities and innovation, the quirky shopping areas, its music and art scene, and its large LGBT population. Read more about Brighton in Autum .

Why is Brighton one of the best England road trips?

Brighton is less than an hour away from London (76 km) and on a direct train line. It offers plenty of fun and exciting activities to enjoy (more than just fish and chips at a pier!)

Brighton has been famous as a cultural centre for over a century. It’s home to the world’s oldest operating aquarium (which opened in 1872- now called ‘’Brighton Sea Life’’), and you can even ride the world’s oldest operating electric railway, the Volks Railway, built in 1883.

Other Brighton Highlights include:

• See the Palace Pier
• Catch the latest release in the Duke of York Picturehouse, Britain’s oldest cinema.
• Have a stroll down the North Lane- home to over 400 independent shops
• Discover the Victorian innovations still in operation in the city.

How long should you spend in Brighton?

You will want to spend at least two days in Brighton to truly take in the city, but you can easily make a week of your itinerary if you want to explore more places in Sussex, Kent and Surrey.  

What is the best month to visit Brighton?

The sunniest (and therefore warmest!) time of the year in Brighton is from May to September. July and August are peak tourist season, with hotel prices skyrocketing, so be aware of that and plan your stay accordingly.

Cambridgeshire & Cambridge

Cambridgeshire is a county in the East of England with plenty to do. The jewel of the county is Cambridge, with a historical, 800-year-old centre you should definitely not skip.

Why should you include Cambridge on your England road trip?

Only 1 hour and 30 minutes away from London via M11, Cambridge offers so much: a rich history of English heritage, a buzzing local community, and a picturesque setting. You’ll even find a gift Henry VIII gave to Anne Boleyn!

Cambridge Highlights

• See the King’s College Chapel 
• Enjoy breakfast at Fitzbillies
• Go punting in the River Cam
• Have a picnic by the river.
• Enjoy walking the historic streets

Cambridge Trip Itinerary idea

Leaving London, head up to Cambridge via the M11.

Start the day with drinks and a meal in one of the many deli and brunch places in Market Square before setting off to explore the city. I highly recommend the famous Fitzbillies- the food is delicious.

From there, you can choose from a variety of activities: visiting King’s Chapel, punting in the River Cam (pass under the Bridge of Sighs), hiking on the Cam Towpath (lots of hidden gems if you know how to look for trails!), or taking in the city views from St. Mary’s Tower.

If you’re staying overnight, end the day by attending the Evensong at the King’s College Chapel (select days only)

When is the best (and worst) time to visit Cambridge ?

Cambridge is beautiful all year round. However, the worst time to visit would be spring – the university students sit their finals between April and June, which means many of the college sites are closed to visitors. 

What are some of the best places to visit in Cambridge?

The King’s College Chapel in the University of Cambridge is the third-oldest university in operation and the most iconic and instantly-recognisable building in the county.

Don’t miss out on an opportunity to drink at the Eagle, a historic pub in the heart of Cambridge’s city centre famously linked to Watson and Crick’s discovery of DNA.

If you are feeling adventurous and are ready to brave the British winter, visit Cambridge in December. It’s off-peak season and features one of the best UK Christmas markets you should visit. Read all about the Cambridge Christmas market here.

How long should you spend in Cambridge?

One day in Cambridge is usually enough time to visit the majority of the main sights, especially if you are visiting during the summer. You’ll need tickets for most of the chapels and university buildings, so go first to buy those.

Wiltshire & Cotswolds Road Trip – 3 day trip from London

Recommended by Ann | The road is life

The Cotswolds is the largest Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB) in England and Wales. If you look at a map of England, find Bristol (west coast, just below the indent of southern Wales) and the Cotswolds is the area north-east of Bristol.

There is so much beauty and fascinating history to discover around the Cotswolds region and luckily you don’t have to travel far from London to get there! You can reach Bath or Bristol easily in a day from London, but we recommend at least 3 days to really explore the area by car/ motorhome, plus explore Stonehenge and Salisbury on the way back to London. If you’re travelling with children, don’t worry- there’s plenty of things to do in the Cotswolds with kids.

Highlights & Best Places to Visit in the Cotswolds and Surrounding Area

• Explore the charming stone villages of the Cotswolds
• visit the historic city of Bath
• marvel at the mysterious ancient stones of Stonehenge
• Indulge in some shopping at Daylesford farm
• stop at the magnificent Salisbury Cathedral.

When is the best time for a Cotswolds road trip?

Although the Cotswolds can be visited all year, this road trip is best completed in the spring or summer months to ensure warmer and sunnier sightseeing weather.

The days are also longer- allowing you to see more each day. However, unlike Cornwall and Devon, most places to NOT shut during winter, so feel free to explore whenever suits you!

Wiltshire & Cotswolds road trip itinerary from London

• Departing London, drive out to the Cotswolds. This is where you should spend 3-4 days exploring as many lovely little towns and villages as you wish to.
• A few of the prettiest Cotswolds villages include Bibury, Stow-on-the-Wold, Lower Slaughter, Bourton-on-the-Water, Castle Combe and so many more! The beauty of the Cotswolds region is that the villages are all located in close proximity with minimal driving time in between them.
• Once you have seen your share of lovely English villages , carry on to Bath which is only a 30-minute drive from the village of Castle Combe- well worth a visit.
• Spend a full day and night in Bath visiting the Roman baths.
• From there continue to Stonehenge. A visit to this incredible ancient site can easily take half a day. We camped overnight at Stonehenge and saw the most INCREDIBLE sunrise we’ve EVER seen. (Seriously, watch the video. It’s breathtaking)
• From Stonehenge, it’s only a short 20-minute drive to the medieval town of Salisbury which brings you to the final stop of this road trip.
• The highlight of Salisbury is the stunning Salisbury Cathedral which has the tallest spire in all of Britain! Spend one night in Salisbury before making the final 2-hour road trip back to London.
• Another option is to return to London via the historic city of Oxford. Don’t miss a meal in Sticks and Sushi- one of the best restaurants in Oxford and with incredible views over the city.

North England Road Trips- Why You Should Visit

It’s easy when planning an England road trip to get sucked into famous places like Cornwall, Devon or the Cotswolds- and those are all AMAZING places to visit.

However, I strongly encourage you to visit the north of England as well if you have time. You’ll find villages just as pretty, delicious food (chips, pie and gravy is the best thing in the world) and incredible history.

Again, we were lucky to live up here for 4 years- here are some of our absolute favourite places to road trip, although there are of course many more we have yet to discover! I hope they give you some ideas and inspiration for your next trip.

Don’t forget to Grab your ULTIMATE road trip planner here – it has everything you need to help you pack for your road trip.

Peak District National Park

The Peak District is a huge and stunning area in Derbyshire, just to the east of Manchester. It’s a perfect place for a road trip because there are so many things to see!

A car or motorhome makes it easy to travel between the sites and there are plenty of campsites or hotels to use as you explore.

There are a multitude of hikes, walks and tors to climb and the area is famous for its caves, which people still lived in as recently as 1910!

The Peak District was the UK’s first National Park and is also considered the real ale capital of the world! If you’re exploring the Peak District with kids , there are steam trains, tramways, cycle paths and even a cable car taking you up to see some stunning views! There’s also Alton Towers theme park – one of the best in the UK.

Best places to explore in the Peak District

Some of the highlights include:

• Chatsworth House
• Ladybower reservoir
• Alton Towers theme park
• Heights of Abraham cable car

Lake District road trip

Recommended by Fiona/ Passport & Piano

The Lake District National Park is a UNESCO heritage site that makes for the perfect road trip.  Walking around the lakes and fells to see the magnificent scenery is one of the many pleasures of the area.

Quintessential villages are plentiful as are traditional English pubs with real ale and hearty food. Don’t just rush by on your way from England to Scotland; take a few days and enjoy all that the lakes have to offer.

Best places to visit on a Lake District Road Trip

Most people arrive from the south via Windermere, but to explore the areas hidden gems its worth spending at least three days here. The Lake District has some of the worlds best scenic drives and a trip along the Honister Pass and Kirkstone Pass are a must.

In the South Lakes, I’d highly recommend a  visit to Grasmere . Here you can visit several homes of the famous poet William Wordsworth and enjoy Sarah Nelson’s delightful gingerbread.

If you love Beatrix Potter, you can follow in her footsteps at Beatrix Potter World in Bowness- on- Windermere.  Her home near Hawkshead is open to visitors, and Wray Castle is a beautiful spot where she enjoyed her family holidays.

In the North Lakes, the towns of Keswick and Cockermouth have plenty to explore. The Castlerigg stone circle, with its stunning views across the fells, is worth stopping at, and the “Surprise View” across Derwent Water is spectacular.

If you’re not exploring in a motorhome or campervan, accommodation throughout the area is plentiful. There are boat rides and water-based activities to enjoy on most of the lakes and a plethora of outdoor pursuit centres for the more adventurous.

When is the best time for a Lake District road trip?

In the summer months, the National Park can be rather busy particularly on the main A66 road which runs through the centre. Hence if you want to avoid the crowds, consider visiting in the spring or autumn.

While you’re not guaranteed sunshine at any time of the year, the weather is probably at its best between April and September.

England Road Trip- Yorkshire & The Dales

Recommended by Sinead | Map Made Memories

England’s largest county, Yorkshire, is a perfect destination for a road trip. There are so many diverse attractions to see within a relatively short drive of each other.

Highlights and some best places in Yorkshire to visit

• Hardraw Force–England’s highest single-drop waterfall
• White Scar–The longest show cave in England
• Visit the ‘Best Street in Britain’
• Visit the cobbled Shambles, named ‘the Best Street in Britain’.
• Marvel at the Ribblehead Viaduct, the 24 arches that span the Yorkshire Dales, a true masterpiece of Victorian engineering.
• Castles and ruins all over the place
• Stand on Hogsmeade station (or at least the station which played it in Harry Potter!)

Yorkshire Road Trip Itinerary

Start your road trip in the rolling hills and river valleys of the beautiful Yorkshire Dales. Visit the 11th century Skipton Castle or descend underground to marvel at the formations in White Scar Caves, the longest show cave in England.

Clamber over Brimham Rocks or hike the stunning landscape around Malham Cove. Browse the independent shops in the Victorian spa town of Harrogate.

Places to visit on the Yorkshire Dales

The Yorkshire Dales are packed with attractive waterfalls. Choose between the plunging falls around Ingleton, popular Aysgarth Falls or, my favourite waterfall, Hardraw Force which is England’s highest single drop waterfall. Before leaving the Dales, visit the impressive monastic ruins and landscaped gardens of Fountains Abbey.

Continue your road trip by exploring the historic city of York . This compact city is easily navigated on foot and is an ideal location for history buffs. You can visit Viking, Roman, Georgian and Victorian sites all in one day!

See the iconic York Minster, walk the city’s medieval city walls and stroll along the cobbled Shambles, which has been voted the ‘ Best Street in Britain’ and was the inspiration behind Diagon Alley from the movie adaptation of the Harry Potter series!

Road trip over the Yorkshire Moors

End your Yorkshire road trip with a drive across the wild Yorkshire Moors. Take a scenic trip on a steam train across the Moors to visit charming Goathland train station which doubled as Hogsmeade station in the Harry Potter movies. Alternatively, your legs with a hike at the Hole of Horcum, a huge ancient natural amphitheatre.

How long should you spend exploring Yorkshire on a road trip?

You could ‘cover’ Yorkshire in a couple of days but to truly appreciate all it has to offer I would recommend at least one full week.

When is the best time to road trip to Yorkshire?

Yorkshire can be explored all year around- and expect rain at any time! But Spring is incredible on the moors- with the wildflowers blooming and the days getting longer, it’s a perfect time to visit. Autumn also offers spectacular views with the leaves turning colour, providing an incredible backdrop.

England Road Trip Idea – North East Coast

Northern England’s east coast is full of charming towns and villages, and is the perfect destination for a road trip.

Best places to visit on a North East coast England road trip

• Saltburn-by-the-Sea (to search for fossils)
• Lemon top ice-cream – Its legacy goes back over 100 years!)
• Staithes- picturesque fishing village
• Whitby Abbey – the inspiration behind Bram Stoker’s Dracula
• Robin Hood’s Bay (where smuggling was commonplace
• Scarborough Castle

North East England road trip itinerary

Start in Saltburn-by-the-sea. Be sure to search for fossils throughout your visit. I actually found one in Saltburn-by-the-Sea, but you can get lucky in any of the places on this list! Saltburn-by-the-Sea is home to the historic Saltburn Cliff Tramway and affords beautiful views from the bluffs above town.

You can walk along The Cleveland Way, a historic trail that runs through each of the 5 locations mentioned. I’d also recommend trying Lemon Top Ice Cream, or vanilla ice cream with a dollop of lemon sorbet on top.

Staithes is a quaint fishing village laden with narrow pathways and quirky cottages.

The Whitby Abbey towers above the town, giving it an eerie feeling – it’s even credited as the inspiration behind Bram Stoker’s Dracula!

Robin Hood’s Bay has a long history with smugglers, and its red rooftops and crowded buildings conceal hidden routes. In Scarborough, you can enjoy rides at the Luna Park amusement park or visit the historic Scarborough Castle!

When is the best time to road trip England’s north-east coast?

Although you can visit this area all year round, I’d suggest visiting in the summer or fall. It rains much of the year in this region of England, but there’s a higher likelihood of sunshine from July through October.

How long to spend on this England Road trip?

You can complete this road trip in less than 2 hours, but I’d suggest spending at least a few days exploring the region. Each Yorkshire coastal town has its own charm and activities to offer, so you certainly don’t want to rush!

How far is it from the North east coast to London?

Scarborough to London takes about 5 hours by car. Avoid travelling Friday afternoons or Monday morning- those are the peak road traffic times.

Don’t miss Durham

We spent a lovely couple of days exploring the city of Durham. There are so many wonderful places to explore, but one of the highlights for us was Durham Cathedral. This incredible building was built in the 11th Century and is the largest surviving stone vaulted ceiling of its size.

However, if I’m honest, I was more excited by the fact that several scenes in Harry Potter were filmed here, including in the cloisters and many of the covered walkways.

It was also in Durham Cathedral that Harry, Ron and Hermione encounter ‘Fluffy’- the forbidden corridor was also part of the cathedral.

Other fantastic things to see in or near Durham include:

• Durham Castle
• High Force Waterfall (one of the best waterfalls in Europe )
• Finchale Priory

Northumberland Coast

Recommended by Tracy | Travels in Time

The Northumberland Coastal route stretches for over 35 miles from Alnmouth in the south to the Holy Island of Lindisfarne in the north.

The drive takes you through an area of outstanding natural beauty with many beautiful villages and places of interest to visit along the way.

How long to spend on a Northumberland coast road trip

This itinerary covers a day trip but you could spend a few days exploring the area or even walk the Northumberland Coastal Path along the same route if you are feeling up to it!

Northumberland road trip itinerary

The first village to visit is Craster – famous for its kippers and overlooked by Dunstanburgh Castle. If you’re looking for impressive castles in England , Northumberland is the place to go- there are more castles here than any other county in England!

After exploring Craster and the castle, head to Seahouses. A popular seaside town for families with lots of arcades and fish and chip shops this is the place to stop for a bite to eat.

If the weather is good why not hop on a boat over to the Farme Islands? With large colonies of seals and puffins the islands are popular with nature lovers.

Bamburgh Castle dominates the horizon and is worth exploring. It was once the home to the Royal Seat of the Kings of Northumbria and also has a ghost or two!

After Bamburgh head to the Holy Island of Lindisfarne. Make sure you check the tides before you go- the island is tidal and is only accessible during certain times.

Once on the island take a stroll up to the castle. Don’t miss exploring the ruins of Lindisfarne Priory. This is the place famous as the home of Christianity in England until Viking raids eventually led to the abandonment of the priory.

When is the best time for a Northumberland road trip?

The best time to visit Northumberland and places in North East England is in the summer – the days are long and the sun will hopefully be shining! Be aware that on occasions during the summer a sea fret (mist) can hang over the coast and cool temperatures and decrease visibility. Make sure to check the weather forecast before you travel.

Wow- anyone else want to jump in their motorhome/ camper/ car/ bike and head off to start exploring? What a fantastic list of England road trip destinations!

As you can see, it really doesn’t matter where you go or how long you have to explore England- you’ll have plenty of places to enjoy. And who knows- next time we set off for Norfolk, we might even make it there without swinging by Cornwall first!! 🙂

Planning an England road trip? You might find these posts useful:

• How to plan an epic UK road trip
• How to create a road trip itinerary with Google Maps
• 100 best road trip driving songs
• How to plan a motorhome trip to UK or Europe

See all our UK travel ideas and tips

Kat never planned to buy a motorhome. She also never planned to quit her job as an air traffic controller, go touring around Europe in said motorhome, start one of the UK’s largest motorhome travel websites… or get a cocker spaniel.

Find out how she went from stuck in the rat race to being a digital nomad and inspiring thousands of people to have their own epic adventures here.

If you’d like to connect with Kat, send her an email or follow her adventures on social media.

Sharing is caring!

Similar Posts

Hampshire & Dorset road trip- 21 beautiful places to visit

One Week in England- itinerary idea

Isle of Skye: The ONLY Itinerary You need (with map!)

Scotland Road Trip: The ONLY itinerary you need (29 unmissable places)

France trip- 7 historical places in France (you HAVE to visit!)

Winter in Spain: 10 Warmest places in mainland Spain for winter sunshine

Cornwall is such a beautiful part of the UK to visit in a motorhome, although it can be a little tight around those country roads.

So true- some of those roads are tiny, but worth it for the incredible views and places to visit.

Have you been on the welsh coast much

Our very first motorhome trip EVER was to the Welsh coast. We’ve put together some of our favourite Welsh road trips here if you want some ideas: https://wandering-bird.com/wales-road-trip/

Although all road trips are lovely, I particularly enjoy traveling in a campervan through Devon in the UK. I appreciate you sharing this list of road trip suggestions.

Fantastic article for anyone travelling England on a road trip

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Planning Your England Trip: Top Tips for First-Time Visitors

W elcome to the land of royalty, tea, and iconic landmarks! England is a country that has something for everyone – from history buffs seeking to explore ancient castles and museums, to foodies looking for a gastronomic adventure. But with so much to experience in this vibrant nation, first-time visitors may find it overwhelming to plan their trip. That’s why we’ve put together this guide filled with top tips on planning your England trip. Get ready for an unforgettable journey through the best of what England has to offer!

Planning When to Visit England

Here, for example, the unpredictability of the English weather will always make it harder for you to properly choose when you should visit this country. The weather can vary greatly depending on the season, so choose wisely! If you’re looking for warm temperatures and sunny skies, plan your trip between June and August. These months are also peak tourist season, so expect larger crowds and higher prices. Spring (March-May) is a great alternative if you want milder weather without the heavy crowds. Autumn (September-November) is another popular time to visit England, with cooler temperatures and beautiful fall foliage in many parts of the country. Winter (December-February) can be cold and rainy but offers a unique experience with festive holiday markets and cozy pubs.

Understanding the Best Ways Get Around England

With the numerous transportation options available, getting around shouldn’t be too much of a hassle. If you feel like it would be good to have someone show you around while also helping you get around, consider Oxford tours or any local tours that might interest you. One of the most popular ways to get around is by using public transport such as buses and trains. The National Rail network connects major cities and towns in England providing an easy way to travel between destinations. Additionally, London has an extensive underground system known as ‘the tube’ which makes it easier to navigate within the city. For those who prefer more flexibility and control over their itinerary, renting a car might be a better option. This allows you to explore at your own pace while enjoying scenic routes along the countryside. However, keep in mind that driving on the left-hand side might take some getting used to. Another great way to see different parts of England is by cycling or walking. Popular trails such as Hadrian’s Wall Path or Cotswold Way offer picturesque views while allowing you to experience nature up close.

What Should You See and Do in England

England is a country with so much to see and do that it can be overwhelming for first-time visitors. From historical landmarks to beautiful countryside, there’s something for everyone in this diverse country. For history buffs, a trip to London is a must-do. The city boasts iconic sites such as the Tower of London, Westminster Abbey and Buckingham Palace. Visitors can also explore British heritage at museums like the British Museum or the National Gallery. Nature lovers should venture out of the bustling cities into England’s picturesque countryside. The Lake District offers stunning scenery with its rolling hills, scenic lakes and charming villages. Meanwhile, Cornwall provides some of Britain’s most beautiful beaches along with traditional fishing ports. Foodies shouldn’t miss trying traditional English cuisine while on their visit! A full English breakfast featuring bacon, sausages and eggs are staples of many menus alongside fish & chips; a classic pub dish consisting of battered fried fish served with chips. Sports enthusiasts will find themselves spoiled for choice when visiting England as well – from attending Premier League football games to watching cricket matches at Lord’s Cricket Grounds!

Where to Stay in England

Depending on the budget you have, as well as the location you want to visit, choosing the right place to stay can impose some challenge. For those looking for a luxurious experience, there are numerous high-end hotels in London such as The Ritz or The Savoy. If you’re interested in something more quaint and traditional, consider staying at a bed and breakfast in the countryside. For travelers on a budget, hostels can be found throughout major cities like London and Manchester. Alternatively, vacation rentals through websites like Airbnb offer unique accommodations that can fit any budget. If you’re looking for a more immersive experience, why not try staying with locals? Homestays allow visitors to live with local families who can provide insights into the best places to visit and eat while giving travelers an authentic taste of English hospitality.

An Introduction to the English Cuisine

Fish and chips is probably the most iconic, but there’s much more to explore beyond this classic dish. One thing you’ll quickly notice about English food is the love of savory pies. From steak and ale pie to chicken pot pie, these hearty meals are perfect for colder weather. And don’t forget about bangers and mash – sausages served with mashed potatoes and gravy. In terms of drinks, tea is a staple in England and you can find teahouses all over the country. Another popular drink is beer – England has a long history of brewing and offers many different types of beer from stouts to IPAs. If you’re feeling brave, try some traditional British desserts like sticky toffee pudding or spotted dick (a type of steamed pudding). And if you want something truly unique, head to London for some jellied eels – a dish made from chopped-up eels in jelly!

Tips for First-Time Visitors to England

• Pack for the Weather: The English weather can be unpredictable, so make sure to pack layers and waterproof gear.
• Learn the Language: Although most people in England speak English, there are some differences in vocabulary and accent. Take some time to familiarize yourself with common phrases.
• Mind Your Manners: English culture places an emphasis on politeness and manners. Remember to say “please” and “thank you,” hold doors open, and queue up in lines.
• Use Public Transportation: Driving on the left side of the road can be daunting for visitors, so opt for public transportation like buses or trains instead.
• Try Local Foods: From fish and chips to bangers and mash, England has a variety of delicious local foods worth trying during your visit.
• Visit Free Attractions: Many museums, parks, churches, and galleries offer free admission throughout England – take advantage!
• Bring a Converter/Adapter: The UK uses different electrical outlets than other parts of Europe or North America – make sure to bring a converter/adapter if needed.
• Respect Historical Sites: England is home to many historic sites that should be treated with respect – refrain from touching artifacts or defacing walls/monuments.

England is a fascinating country that offers visitors a unique blend of history, culture, and natural beauty. Whether you’re interested in exploring the bustling cities or wandering through picturesque countryside, there’s something for everyone in England. By following these top tips for first-time visitors to England – including planning your trip around the best time to visit, understanding transportation options, and choosing the right places to stay and eat – you’ll be well on your way to having an unforgettable experience. Remember: travel at its core is about exploration and learning. So don’t be afraid to venture off the beaten path and discover all that this wonderful country has to offer!

The post Planning Your England Trip: Top Tips for First-Time Visitors appeared first on Sunny Sweet Days .

• London Tourism
• London Hotels
• London Bed and Breakfast
• London Vacation Rentals
• Flights to London
• London Restaurants
• Things to Do in London
• London Travel Forum
• London Photos
• All London Hotels
• London Hotel Deals
• Last Minute Hotels in London
• Things to Do
• Restaurants
• Vacation Rentals
• Travel Stories
• Rental Cars
• Add a Place
• Travel Forum
• Travelers' Choice
• Help Center

Seeking Feedback on My 4-Day London Itinerary & Budget Plan - London Forum

• Europe    
• United Kingdom (UK)    
• England    
• London    

Seeking Feedback on My 4-Day London Itinerary & Budget Plan

• United States Forums
• Europe Forums
• Canada Forums
• Asia Forums
• Central America Forums
• Africa Forums
• Caribbean Forums
• Mexico Forums
• South Pacific Forums
• South America Forums
• Middle East Forums
• Honeymoons and Romance
• Business Travel
• Train Travel
• Traveling With Disabilities
• Tripadvisor Support
• Solo Travel
• Bargain Travel
• Timeshares / Vacation Rentals
• England forums
• London forum

Hello everyone,

Day 1: Historic and Cultural Highlights

Tower of London , Tower Bridge , St. Paul's Cathedral , Tate Modern , and Borough Market for dinner.

Day 2: Westminster and Governmental Sights

Westminster Abbey , Houses of Parliament , Big Ben , Churchill War Rooms, and the National Gallery . I might catch the Changing of the Guard at Buckingham Palace if time allows.

Day 3: Museum Day

Natural History Museum, Victoria and Albert Museum, and an evening stroll in Hyde Park .

Day 4: Central London and Thematic Tours

The British Museum in the morning followed by The Battle of Britain Walking Tour. Free time in the afternoon for shopping or revisiting areas.

Estimated Costs:

Attractions:

Total for paid entries: £153.50

Transportation:

Using an Oyster Card with a daily cap, approximately £7.40 x 4 days = £29.60

Budget Option: £10-£15 per day

Moderate Option: £20-£30 per day

Higher-end Option: £40+ per day

Accommodation:

Hostels: Approx. £25 per night, total for 4 nights around £100.

Airbnb (Private Room): Approx. £60 per night, total for 4 nights around £240.

I plan to walk between nearby attractions to save on transportation costs and get a more intimate look at the city. I would love to hear if you think this plan is feasible, any cost-saving tips, or if there are any must-see spots I might have missed. Thanks for your help!

18 replies to this topic

Oyster caps are a bit higher. Tube is now 8.50 for zones 1-2. Bus-only daily cap is 5.25.

It depends on which day of the week you’re planning to do those activities. Some sights will be closed.

Forget buying an Oyster and just use a contactless credit/debit card.

The lower end of your budget food option is only just above subsistence level especially if you have no access to a fridge or cooker. You might manage if you buy a loaf plus a cheap filling for three meals a day and stick to water but it would be pretty dismal.

“ I plan to walk between nearby attractions to save on transportation costs “

IMO, transportation costs are capped (on contactless as well as on Oyster) so you are adding a physical burden that you really don’t need to worry about.

If you really want to save money, you can save £7 by not buying an oyster card!

https://www.tripadvisor.co.uk/RestaurantsNear-g186338-d260500-Borough_Market-London_England.html

You say 'I' but are you travelling with others, any children and their ages?

There are also restaurants near Tate Modern you could dine in and save the trip to the area around the market.

But I imagine that the OP is thinking of the market experience.

Not sure how many of the things you've listed on Day 1 and 2 you actually wish to visit, but you may not be able to visit all.

The Oyster cap is now £8.50. To save money, use a contactless payment option (card, phone or watch) instead of buying an Oyster card .

For food in your budget, find the nearest Gregs, or a supermarket who do lunch deals for under a tenner.

You won't find an Airbnb in London for £60 per night unless you're looking to share bathrooms or a hostel.

Are you just walking past these places or actually going in? Way too much packed in.

• Heathrow To Gatwick 1:20 pm
• Hotel Choice 12:33 pm
• Hotel Hoppa Bus - Heathrow 12:23 pm
• London for one night then car rental location? 11:42 am
• Whirlwind trip to London w/ 11 year old- what would you do? 11:30 am
• Ulez Heathrow Airport/congestion charge 11:13 am
• London Entry Requirement 11:13 am
• Glasgow to london hammersmith 9:51 am
• Bus and Subway payment 9:30 am
• Changing the Guard - Reality 7:50 am
• Tower of London refund 7:41 am
• Fast Track Tickets 7:14 am
• A Place Like Home Options 6:50 am
• "Anytime" rail ticket 5:04 am
• Best Area of London to Stay for 2 nights 15 replies
• How to get to Victoria Station from Heathrow? 10 replies
• The London Pass...worth it or scam? 10 replies
• Best hotel for Heathrow Terminal 3? 8 replies
• Hostel/Hotel Near Liverpool Street Station 4 replies
• outlet shops in London? 12 replies
• Heathrow to Kings Cross 7 replies
• London - factory / designer outlet malls 12 replies
• weather in december 5 replies
• Best Area to Stay in London 8 replies

London Hotels and Places to Stay

• What can I do in London on a budget?
• How to use Oyster Cards, Travelcards and 2-4-1 offers in London?
• What is open in London on Christmas Day
• The Championships, Wimbledon
• Harry Potter in London - FAQ

Politics latest: MSP who could decide Humza Yousaf's fate appears to reveal price for her support

Scotland's first minister says he will fight a vote in his leadership and is "very confident" of winning. Listen to this week's episode of the Electoral Dysfunction podcast while you scroll through the latest updates.

Friday 26 April 2024 18:00, UK

Please use Chrome browser for a more accessible video player

• Yousaf tells Sky News he'll 'fight' vote of no-confidence and is optimistic of winning
• MSP who could decide his fate seems to have named price for her support
• Connor Gillies:  First minister must reset relations with very people he's burned bridges with
• Explained: How did we get here - and what happens next?
• Coming up on Sunday: PM sits down with Trevor Phillips
• Latest  Electoral Dysfunction podcast explores what next week's local elections will bring
• Sam Coates explains why they matter
• Live reporting by Charlotte Chelsom-Pill

Rishi Sunak  sits down this Sunday with Trevor Phillips for a wide-ranging interview ahead of the local elections.

With the Rwanda bill becoming law this week and the PM announcing a commitment to increase defence spending, there's been plenty to talk about.

You can watch it in full from 8.30am on Sunday .

Trevor will also be joined by Labour's shadow health secretary Wes Streeting .

Embattled Humza Yousaf has told Sky News he will not resign as Scotland's first minister.

Pressure has been building on  the SNP leader  after he tore up the power-sharing deal with the Scottish Greens - prompting a no-confidence motion in his leadership and a threatened knife-edge vote.

However, Mr Yousaf, on a visit to Dundee that was arranged at short notice after he pulled out of a speech in Glasgow, insisted he was getting on with the job and accused the opposition of "playing games".

He said he would be writing to the leaders of all Scottish political parties to seek talks on making a minority government work.

He told Sky's Scotland correspondent Connor Gillies : "I intend absolutely to fight that vote of no confidence, I've got every intention of winning that vote of no confidence.

"And let me say to the opposition for minority government to work in the interest of the people of Scotland also requires the opposition to act in good faith."

Humza Yousaf's future as first minister is hanging in the balance ahead of a motion of no confidence next week.

Now, as leader of a minority government, his fate may be hanging on just one vote - that of a former SNP leadership rival. 

We take a look at how:

The numbers

In the Scottish parliament, the SNP has 63 seats out of 129 , two short of an outright majority;

The Conservatives have  31;

Labour has 22;

The Greens have  seven;

The Liberal Democrats have four;

The Alba Party has one ;

There is also one presiding officer Alison Johnstone, who is both an MSP and Scotland's equivalent of the Commons speaker.

How the numbers are expected to fall

The motion of no confidence was brought by the Scottish Conservatives.

The Greens, Labour and the Lib Dems have all said they are backing the motion.

That would translate into 64 votes against the first minister versus 63 SNP votes.

So the one Alba vote is expected to be key.

How it may all come down to one ... Ash Regan

Once an SNP leadership rival to Mr Yousaf, Ash Regan defected to Alex Salmond's Alba Party last October. 

If she backs Mr Yousaf then that would mean both sides have 64 votes.

Ms Johnstone would then be expected to vote in favour of the status quo, so the first minister would survive.

But if Ms Regan votes against Mr Yousaf, then the opposition parties will have 65 votes against the SNP's 63, and the first minister would lose.

He wouldn't be compelled to resign in this situation, but he'd be under huge pressure to step aside.

More to come

And remember, Scottish Labour have lodged a separate motion of no confidence in the Scottish government. 

Alba have said it won't back that motion.

Scotland's First Minister Humza Yousaf is battling to save his job as he faces a knife-edge no-confidence vote.

The SNP leader triggered a crisis at Holyrood after he dramatically brought the power-sharing deal with the Scottish Greens to an end.

The backlash has plunged Mr Yousaf's future into doubt, although party colleagues insist he will not resign.

How did we get here?

The Bute House Agreement - signed back in 2021 and named after the first minister's official residence in Edinburgh - brought the Green Party into government for the first time anywhere in the UK.

It gave the SNP a majority at Holyrood when the votes of its MSPs were combined with those of the seven Green members, and also made Green co-leaders Patrick Harvie and Lorna Slater junior ministers.

Without it, the SNP would need to have operated as a minority administration at Holyrood.

What caused the relationship to sour?

There had been mounting tensions between the largest party at Holyrood and their junior partners in government.

The Greens were angered at the SNP-led administration's recent decision to ditch a key climate change target.

That, combined with the decision to pause the prescription of new puberty blockers to under-18s at at Scotland's only gender clinic, resulted in the Greens announcing they would have a vote on the future of the power-sharing deal. 

Read more here:

The 2 May local elections will see more than 2,600 seats at stake across 107 English councils.

Labour's Sadiq Khan and Andy Burnham are among the 10 mayors up for re-election.  

Those in Blackpool South will also be voting for their next MP after ex-Tory Scott Benton broke Commons lobbying rules, triggering a by-election.  

With the Conservatives lagging behind Labour in the polls, the outcome will offer some insight on how voters in England and Wales feel ahead of the general election.

On the Sky News Daily, Niall Paterson is joined by deputy political editor Sam Coates to discuss why the elections are so important for the prime minister's future and where the key political backgrounds are.

By Daniel Dunford , senior data journalist

There might not be a general election just yet, but there are important votes that will define how the areas around us are run for the next four years. 

See what's happening where you are here:

With the local elections less than a week away, deputy political editor Sam Coates explains why they matter and what they might tell us about the upcoming general election.

Ash Regan - the MSP who could decide the future of Humza Yousaf - has appeared to name her price for her support in next week's no-confidence vote.

She has said, in a letter to Alba Party members, that investment in the Grangemouth refinery will be a key condition of her backing the first minister.

The refinery is currently due to shut as early as next year and move to being an import and export terminal.

Alba has launched a a campaign to sustain jobs at the refinery.

"A sign of good faith would be a significant government investment, reinforcing the campaign to save the Grangemouth refinery from closure," she says in her letter.

"I am requesting the undertaking to produce such an initiative in the early course.

"I am hopeful that the first minister will commit to such an initiative in the near future as a sign of our shared dedication to Scotland's welfare."

Ms Regan was once part of the SNP and ran in the contest to succeed Nicola Sturgeon as leader last year, the contest Mr Yousaf won.

She defected to Alex Salmond's Alba Party in October. 

The battle for a town that no one there wants.

Sky News is reporting from Grimsby in the run-up to the general election as one of its Target Towns - a key constituency prized by both Conservatives and Labour - Great Grimsby and Cleethorpes.

But it turns out that Grimsby doesn't really want them.

It hasn't always been a town doused in apathy. 

In 2016, 70% of people here voted to leave the EU - one of the highest results in the country - and in the 2019 election, the constituency turned Tory for the first time since the Second World War.

But five years on, polling by Sky News found that since then, the number of people saying they "almost never" trust the British government to place the needs of the nation above the interests of their own party has nearly doubled - from 26% to 49%.

It's a stark but bleak view. Voters described both leaders as uninspiring and uninteresting.

When asked what they make of the current prime minister, words like "weak" and "performative" were used. 

Voters couldn't make their minds up about the Labour leader, saying they were unsure about him or his policies.

The lack of a clear dividing line between the two parties could be a problem in the general election, especially as both parties have been trying to show a bit more leg this week ahead of a fully-fledged election campaign.

Labour has shown a hint of more radical policies, with their announcement on aiming to nationalise railways within five years. 

But have they waited a bit too long to impress the people of Grimsby?

The Conservatives ratified their Rwanda policy into law, but voters here weren't hugely enthused by that either, with one member of the audience tonight proclaiming they care much more about housing and the environment. 

They asked - why is the centre of political debate about Rwanda and a policy we don't really care about?

Apathy might override this election.

By  Jennifer Scott , political reporter

Voters in Grimsby - one of Sky News's election Target Towns - have been offering their views on politics, politicians and "broken promises".

The electoral battle in Grimsby and Cleethorpes,  the Target Towns , will be fierce. Labour will need an 11.7 point swing to win this newly-merged constituency back from the Conservatives.

In 2019, residents in Grimsby voted Tory for the first time since the end of the Second World War. The old Cleethorpes constituency was always more of a bellwether, having voted Conservative since 2010.

However, it has shed some of its rural, Conservative-voting residents in the merger.

Speaking on the  Politics Hub With Sophy Ridge , small business owner Shannon said she might not vote in the next general election later this year as she "just can't trust anything anybody says".

She said she has felt this way since Brexit - something Grimsby was overwhelmingly in support of - because "we were promised 'x' and 'y' and it hasn't happened, so I'm just totally disengaged from it".

Asked whether local MPs on the panel - Conservative Lia Nici and Labour's Melanie Onn - could change her mind, Shannon said "possibly", but reiterated how let down local people feel.

"We're promised a lot, but it's never delivered," she said. "Talk of things happening... and then it doesn't happen and people are just fed up... have been told this is what we're going to get, but it doesn't actually happen. And that's why people have just lost faith."

Be the first to get Breaking News

Install the Sky News app for free

Protect Your Trip »

13 most romantic getaways in new hampshire.

From Portsmouth to the famous Omni Mount Washington Resort, these are the most romantic getaways in New Hampshire.

Romantic Getaways in New Hampshire

Courtesy of Chesterfield Inn

The Chesterfield Inn offers cozy accommodations for couples.

Couples may be surprised to find that New Hampshire is filled with an array of enchanting destinations. From the majestic White Mountains to the quiet of Squam Lake, this quintessential New England getaway has been capturing the hearts of travelers for generations. Whether your ideal romantic getaway includes winter sleigh rides, an autumn road trip or exploring a seaside town, the Granite State has you covered. Read on to discover the most romantic getaways in New Hampshire.

• Omni Mount Washington Resort
• Church Landing at Mill Falls

North Conway

• Mountain View Grand Resort & Spa
• Wentworth by the Sea
• Adair Country Inn
• Chesterfield Inn
• The Glen House Hotel
• Sugar Hill Inn

Getty Images

This seaside city, situated along the tranquil Piscataqua River, is one of New Hampshire's most popular destinations for couples. Here, twosomes can gaze at period furniture at The Moffatt-Ladd House & Garden or walk hand in hand through sprawling Prescott Park, a waterfront public park boasting manicured gardens and peaceful fountains. Meanwhile, history buffs won't want to miss the Strawbery Banke Museum, where costumed actors reenact what life was like in New England hundreds of years ago. Don't forget to make time for a stroll through Market Square – this quaint downtown area is lined with art galleries, antique shops and historic buildings, the latter of which house restaurants, breweries and more.

Where to stay: After a day of exploring, head back to your cozy digs at The Hotel Portsmouth. Boasting plush bedding, private baths and flat-screen TVs, this charming hotel scores major points thanks to its convenient and walkable location in downtown Portsmouth. To really sweep your partner off their feet, book your stay in The Loft. This bi-level suite comes equipped with a king bed, two bathrooms, a claw-foot soaking tub and a living room. A light breakfast is also included in rates.

Omni Mount Washington Resort: Bretton Woods

Courtesy of Omni Hotels & Resorts

Located in the heart of the White Mountains, the Omni Mount Washington Resort is ideal for couples seeking a luxurious respite in nature. Whether you're lounging by the pool, snuggling up by the fire or basking in stunning views from the seasonal rooftop bar, this grand property is the perfect destination for a romantic getaway. For maximum comfort, recent guests recommend opting for a spacious room in the Presidential Wing, which features deluxe bathrooms and private patios or balconies.

In addition to ample amenities and lavish accommodations, this mountain resort offers countless activities for you and your sweetie to enjoy. When you're not challenging your beau to a tennis match or teeing off on Omni Mount Washington's championship golf courses, try soaring above the Presidential Range on a thrilling canopy tour. Or, put your equestrian skills to the test on a guided horseback ride through the White Mountains. An autumn visit allows couples to witness some of New England's best fall foliage , while winter travelers can take advantage of the resort's many cold weather activities, including scenic gondola rides, skiing, tubing, sleigh rides and more.

After a day packed with activities, soothe your aching muscles with a couples massage at the on-site spa before settling in for a romantic dinner for two at Stickney's, a steakhouse featuring a seasonal menu.

Address: 310 Mount Washington Hotel Road, Bretton Woods, NH 03575

Church Landing at Mill Falls: Meredith

Situated on Lake Winnipesaukee's Meredith Bay, this charming lakeside hideaway is one of four properties that make up the village-style resort Mill Falls at the Lake. The Adirondack-style inn is loved by travelers for its homey atmosphere, complete with rustic touches like wood furnishings and stone fireplaces.

Begin your morning with a relaxing outdoor yoga session, then get out on Lake Winnipesaukee on a kayak or stand-up paddleboard. Couples can also use the resort's complimentary bikes to explore nearby Main Street, which is dotted with restaurants, local boutiques and antique stores.

If you'd rather spend your romantic getaway being pampered, opt instead for an indulgent massage or hydrating facial at Cascade Spa. In the evening, feast on lobster rolls and ribeye at Church Landing's cozy Lakehouse Grille before roasting marshmallows over the outside fire pit. When it's time to hit the hay, twosomes will enjoy perks like luxurious down bedding, lakefront views, and patios or balconies in all guest rooms.

Address: 281 Daniel Webster Highway, Meredith, NH 03253

North Conway is especially popular in winter, thanks in large part to its abundance of great ski areas . However, couples will find plenty of things to do year-round. Top activities include hiking to the Diana's Baths waterfalls, driving the famous Kancamagus Highway, and riding the Conway Scenic Railroad through Mount Washington Valley and Crawford Notch. Just don't leave without picking up some delicious treats from the Bavarian Chocolate Haus, an old-fashioned chocolate shop selling house-made truffles, fudge, nonpareils and more.

Where to stay: Bed down at White Mountain Hotel & Resort , a family-owned and -operated establishment that boasts a heated outdoor pool, a nine-hole golf course and Finnish saunas. The resort is adjacent to Echo Lake State Park, so couples can explore the region's hiking trails after filling up on creative New England cuisine at Ledges Restaurant.

Another top-notch lodging option is Stonehurst Manor . In addition to elegant 19th-century furnishings, guest rooms include details like opulent four-poster beds, fireplaces and whirlpool baths. For added ambiance, plan your trip for January to experience the hotel's annual Ice Bar, a full-size outdoor bar that is carved entirely out of ice.

Read: The Top Things to Do in New Hampshire

Mountain View Grand Resort & Spa: Whitefield

Courtesy of Mountain View Grand Resort & Spa

Overlooking New Hampshire's spectacular White Mountain National Forest, the historic Mountain View Grand Resort & Spa is one of New England's premier destinations for couples. Equipped with both an outdoor and an indoor pool, clay tennis courts, a nine-hole golf course, an ax-throwing arena and a working farm, Mountain View Grand Resort & Spa has no shortage of fun activities for you and your other half to enjoy. When you're not shooting pool in the game room, snuggle up at the on-site movie theater for a romantic date night – there are more than 500 titles to choose from.

Couples can savor delicious farm-to-table fare at the Harvest Tavern, or reserve a table at the 1865 Wine Cellar for a one-of-a-kind fine dining experience. After filling up on specialties like seared quail and veal tenderloin, retreat to one of the resort's elegantly appointed guest rooms, all of which boast plush bedding and flat-screen TVs. For the best views of Mount Lafayette and Cannon Mountain, book a southern-facing room.

Address: 101 Mountain View Road, Whitefield, NH 03598

Filled with countless activities and several top-notch hotels, the town of Lincoln fits the bill for a romantic getaway in New Hampshire. Head to Franconia Notch State Park to explore the spectacular Flume Gorge, a natural gorge extending along the base of Mount Liberty, or soar over the treetops on a scenic gondola ride. There are myriad ways to spend your time in Lincoln, but couples would be remiss to skip the premier Ice Castles, a unique frozen experience that features crawl tunnels, slides, a bar and more – built entirely out of ice.

Where to stay: After exploring the region's top attractions, snuggle up at one of Lincoln's high-end hotels. RiverWalk Resort at Loon Mountain is loved by travelers for its lagoon-style swimming pool – which transforms into an ice skating rink come winter – and on-site Italian restaurant, not to mention the property's Seven Birches Winery.

If you're looking for something more intimate, consider staying at Red Sleigh Inn. This five-bedroom lodge receives glowing reviews from visitors thanks to its unmatched hospitality, clean accommodations and contactless check-in process.

Wentworth by the Sea, A Marriott Hotel & Spa: New Castle

Courtesy of Wentworth by the Sea, A Marriott Hotel & Spa

Couples looking to celebrate their love in style should look no further than Wentworth by the Sea, a Marriott Hotel & Spa . Boasting stellar ocean views and steeped in old-world charm, this 19th-century hotel on New Castle Island was made for twosomes seeking time alone in a scenic seaside setting.

Not only were recent guests blown away by the beautiful grounds, but they raved over the friendly staff and well-appointed guest rooms (which feature marble bathrooms, large windows, minifridges and flat-screen TVs). For further amenities like a fireplace, a kitchenette, a whirlpool bathtub, a balcony and additional living space, couples can splurge on a waterfront Marina Suite. In addition to cushy accommodations, the hotel boasts a full-service spa, three hot tubs and two heated pools. In the evening, lovebirds can dine on flavorful entrees (think: grilled mahi-mahi and crab-stuffed haddock) at SALT Kitchen & Bar while sampling vino from the extensive wine list.

Address: 588 Wentworth Road, New Castle, NH 03854

Adair Country Inn: Bethlehem

Courtesy of Adair Country Inn & Restaurant

Once a private residence located less than 3 miles from the town of Littleton, this quaint property was converted into an inn in 1992. While some rooms feature modern furnishings like granite countertops and jetted tubs, others have maintained their rustic charm. Book your stay in the Bickford room for details like a four-poster bed, wingback chair and dormer windows, or enjoy perks like a private patio and cathedral ceilings in the Sinclair Suite. Recent travelers raved over the excellent service and well-kept grounds, saying a romantic stroll through the property's fairytale gardens is a can't-miss.

For further pampering, opt for the "Romantic Getaway" special, which includes extras like fresh flowers, candles and sparkling wine. Later, retreat to the dining room, where you can taste specialties like venison-stuffed mushroom caps and sauteed scallops.

Address: 80 Guider Lane, Bethlehem, NH 03574

Tips on Trips and Expert Picks Newsletter

Travel tips, vacation ideas and more to make your next vacation stellar.

Sign up to receive the latest updates from U.S News & World Report and our trusted partners and sponsors. By clicking submit, you are agreeing to our Terms and Conditions & Privacy Policy .

Chesterfield Inn: West Chesterfield

This classic New England B&B beckons to couples seeking a romantic getaway off the beaten path. The property boasts three buildings where twosomes can stay: The Main Inn, The Cottage and the Johanna Wetherby Building. No matter which residence you choose, you will be treated to modern amenities like flat-screen TVs and spacious private baths; past guests especially loved the comfortable beds and beautiful mountain views. Plus, many accommodations offer jetted tubs, private entrances, balconies or patios, and fireplaces.

Up the romance factor even further with the "Date Your Mate Package," which includes a three-course dinner, a bottle of prosecco and breakfast in bed. For couples with a sweet tooth, the "Death by Chocolate" package comes with decadent treats like chocolate-covered strawberries and L.A. Burdick hot chocolate.

If you can tear yourself away from your elegant digs, head off campus to one of the region's numerous apple orchards or sugarhouses for a maple syrup tasting. Time your visit for fall to explore nearby Pisgah State Park's vibrant foliage, or travel during the colder months to see the inn transform into a winter wonderland.

Address: 20 Cross Road, West Chesterfield, NH 03466

Jackson attracts couples who are looking for a classic New England mountain getaway. Snap a photo under the covered Honeymoon Bridge, hike to Glen Ellis Falls or arrive in winter to enjoy an Austrian sleigh ride with your honey at Nestlenook Farm.

Where to stay: After an exhausting day of activities, bed down at the Inn at Ellis River. Many guest rooms here come with balconies, jetted tubs and fireplaces; all are decorated with antique period furnishings. Time your visit for December, when the property hosts its annual Inn-to-Inn Holiday Cookie Tour, an event that anyone with a sweet tooth will love. Another great place to hang your hat in Jackson is The Inn at Thorn Hill & Spa, a regal property with a wine cellar and a library. For the most impressive views of Mount Washington, opt for the Presidential Suite, which comes outfitted with a king bed, gas fireplace, a deep soaking tub and two wingback chairs.

The Glen House Hotel: Gorham

Courtesy of The Glen House Hotel

Nestled in New Hampshire's White Mountains, this four-season property is the perfect place for lovebirds to rekindle their romance. In summer, you and your beau can rent bikes to explore nearby Great Glen Trails, or get out on the Androscoggin River in a kayak. In winter, enjoy thrilling activities like cross-country skiing , tubing and snowshoeing, or hop on the Mt. Washington SnowCoach for a narrated adventure tour of the region. Meanwhile, couples who visit between late May and late October will be able to drive the legendary Mt. Washington Auto Road to the mountain's summit – the highest peak in the Northeast.

No matter what time of year you visit The Glen House Hotel, recent visitors say the property's spacious and clean accommodations won't disappoint. Each of the hotel's nearly 70 guest rooms come outfitted with full-length armoires, vanity mirrors and flat-screen TVs; for extra perks like a balcony and picturesque mountain views, consider splurging on one of the property's premium rooms. Explore beyond your luxury digs to find an indoor saltwater pool, a panoramic deck with a fire pit and The Notch Grille, the on-site restaurant serving up everything from sumptuous burgers and lobster rolls to filet mignon.

Address: 979 state Route 16, Gorham, NH 03581

To enjoy the unspoiled natural beauty of New Hampshire's Lakes Region away from the crowds, head to Squam Lake. This quiet getaway northwest of Lake Winnipesaukee is cherished by travelers for its peaceful atmosphere and abundant wildlife. While you're here, keep your eyes peeled for bald eagles, loons and great blue herons, and don't forget to visit the Squam Lakes Natural Science Center to hike the live animal exhibit trail.

Where to stay: Twosomes will want to book their stay at The Manor on Golden Pond , which offers amenities like a relaxing spa and afternoon tea, as well as thoughtfully appointed accommodations with wood-burning fireplaces and secluded decks.

Another top lodging option, The Inn on Golden Pond, grants access to outdoor fire pits, a private beach and more.

Sugar Hill Inn: Sugar Hill

Built in the 18th century as a quaint family farmhouse, this quintessential New England B&B is now a sanctuary for lovebirds. In addition to the historic main building's eight cozy rooms and suites, Sugar Hill Inn has expanded to include several small vacation cottages featuring luxurious amenities. These secluded residences boast private baths, gas fireplaces, a porch and original artwork; some even come equipped with double whirlpool tubs, saunas and rain showers. All accommodations include a daily breakfast and a variety of small afternoon bites.

While you're here, say goodbye to stress with a relaxing hot stone massage, then join a guided hike or rock climbing experience with one of Sugar Hill Inn's trusted vendors. When your stomach starts to rumble, previous guests highly recommend the property's dining room, where you can savor delicious entrees made with fresh local produce and herbs grown in the on-site garden. If you're really looking to wow your significant other, book the inn's "Romantic Getaway" package, which includes Champagne and chocolates upon arrival, handmade souvenir mugs, and two four-course dinners.

Address: 116 state Route 117, Sugar Hill Road, Sugar Hill, NH 03586

You might also be interested in:

• The Most Romantic Getaways in Maine
• The Most Romantic Getaways in Vermont
• The Most Charming B&Bs in the U.S.

Tags: Travel , Couples Vacations , New England Vacations , US Vacations

World's Best Places To Visit

• # 1 South Island, New Zealand
• # 4 Bora Bora

If you make a purchase from our site, we may earn a commission. This does not affect the quality or independence of our editorial content.

You May Also Like

Flight canceled or delayed what to do.

Amanda Norcross April 26, 2024

The Best Beach Hats

Megan Johnson and Sharael Kolberg April 26, 2024

The Best Florence Tours

John Rodwan April 25, 2024

How Much Does a Cruise Cost?

Gwen Pratesi April 24, 2024

The Best Whale Watching in Cape Cod

Lyn Mettler April 24, 2024

Best Whale Watching Tours in Maine

Marisa Méndez April 23, 2024

The Best Wineries in Napa Valley

April 23, 2024

The Best East Coast Beaches

April 19, 2024

The Best Luggage Brands

Rachael Hood April 17, 2024

The Best Carry-on Luggage

Erin Evans , Rachael Hood , Catriona Kendall , Amanda Norcross and Leilani Osmundson April 17, 2024